* gdb.texinfo (Command Files): Explain order of init file reading.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdb.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (c) 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c
4 @c %**start of header
5 @c makeinfo ignores cmds prev to setfilename, so its arg cannot make use
6 @c of @set vars. However, you can override filename with makeinfo -o.
7 @setfilename gdb.info
8 @c
9 @include gdb-cfg.texi
10 @c
11 @ifset GENERIC
12 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN}
13 @end ifset
14 @ifclear GENERIC
15 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN} (@value{TARGET})
16 @end ifclear
17 @setchapternewpage odd
18 @c %**end of header
19
20 @iftex
21 @c @smallbook
22 @c @cropmarks
23 @end iftex
24
25 @finalout
26 @syncodeindex ky cp
27
28 @c readline appendices use @vindex
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @c ===> NOTE! <==
32 @c Determine the edition number in *three* places by hand:
33 @c 1. First ifinfo section 2. title page 3. top node
34 @c To find the locations, search for !!set
35
36 @c GDB CHANGELOG CONSULTED BETWEEN:
37 @c Fri Oct 11 23:27:06 1991 John Gilmore (gnu at cygnus.com)
38 @c Sat Dec 22 02:51:40 1990 John Gilmore (gnu at cygint)
39
40 @c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO-2 macros and info-makers to format properly.
41
42 @ifinfo
43 @c This is a dir.info fragment to support semi-automated addition of
44 @c manuals to an info tree. zoo@cygnus.com is developing this facility.
45 @format
46 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47 * Gdb:: The GNU debugger.
48 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
49 @end format
50 @end ifinfo
51 @c
52 @c
53 @ifinfo
54 This file documents the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
55
56 @c !!set edition, date, version
57 This is Edition 4.09, August 1993,
58 of @cite{Debugging with @value{GDBN}: the GNU Source-Level Debugger}
59 for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
60
61 Copyright (C) 1988, '89, '90, '91, '92, '93 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
62
63 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
64 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
65 are preserved on all copies.
66
67 @ignore
68 Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
69 results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
70 notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
71 (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
72
73 @end ignore
74 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
75 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
76 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
77 permission notice identical to this one.
78
79 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
80 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
81 @end ifinfo
82
83 @titlepage
84 @title Debugging with @value{GDBN}
85 @subtitle The GNU Source-Level Debugger
86 @ifclear GENERIC
87 @subtitle (@value{TARGET})
88 @end ifclear
89 @sp 1
90 @c !!set edition, date, version
91 @subtitle Edition 4.09, for @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN}
92 @subtitle August 1993
93 @author Richard M. Stallman and Roland H. Pesch
94 @page
95 @tex
96 {\parskip=0pt
97 \hfill (Send bugs and comments on @value{GDBN} to bug-gdb\@prep.ai.mit.edu.)\par
98 \hfill {\it Debugging with @value{GDBN}}\par
99 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
100 \hfill pesch\@cygnus.com\par
101 }
102 @end tex
103
104 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
105 Copyright @copyright{} 1988, '89, '90, '91, '92, '93 Free Software
106 Foundation, Inc.
107 @sp 2
108 Published by the Free Software Foundation @*
109 675 Massachusetts Avenue, @*
110 Cambridge, MA 02139 USA @*
111 Printed copies are available for $20 each. @*
112 ISBN 1-882114-11-6 @*
113
114 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
115 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
116 are preserved on all copies.
117
118 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
119 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
120 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
121 permission notice identical to this one.
122
123 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
124 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
125 @end titlepage
126 @page
127
128 @ifinfo
129 @node Top
130 @top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
131
132 This file describes @value{GDBN}, the GNU symbolic debugger.
133
134 @c !!set edition, date, version
135 This is Edition 4.09, August 1993, for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
136
137 @menu
138 * Summary:: Summary of @value{GDBN}
139 @ifset NOVEL
140 * New Features:: New features since GDB version 3.5
141 @end ifset
142 @ifclear BARETARGET
143 * Sample Session:: A sample @value{GDBN} session
144 @end ifclear
145
146 * Invocation:: Getting in and out of @value{GDBN}
147 * Commands:: @value{GDBN} commands
148 * Running:: Running programs under @value{GDBN}
149 * Stopping:: Stopping and continuing
150 * Stack:: Examining the stack
151 * Source:: Examining source files
152 * Data:: Examining data
153 @ifclear CONLY
154 * Languages:: Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
155 @end ifclear
156 @ifset CONLY
157 * C:: C language support
158 @end ifset
159 @c remnant makeinfo bug, blank line needed after two end-ifs?
160
161 * Symbols:: Examining the symbol table
162 * Altering:: Altering execution
163 * GDB Files:: @value{GDBN} files
164 * Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
165 * Controlling GDB:: Controlling @value{GDBN}
166 * Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
167 @ifclear DOSHOST
168 * Emacs:: Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
169 @end ifclear
170
171 * GDB Bugs:: Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
172 * Command Line Editing:: Facilities of the readline library
173 * Using History Interactively::
174 @ifset NOVEL
175 * Renamed Commands::
176 @end ifset
177 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
178 * Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print GDB documentation
179 * Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
180 @end ifclear
181
182 * Index:: Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifinfo
185
186 @node Summary
187 @unnumbered Summary of @value{GDBN}
188
189 The purpose of a debugger such as @value{GDBN} is to allow you to see what is
190 going on ``inside'' another program while it executes---or what another
191 program was doing at the moment it crashed.
192
193 @value{GDBN} can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
194 these) to help you catch bugs in the act:
195
196 @itemize @bullet
197 @item
198 Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its behavior.
199
200 @item
201 Make your program stop on specified conditions.
202
203 @item
204 Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.
205
206 @item
207 Change things in your program, so you can experiment with correcting the
208 effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.
209 @end itemize
210
211 @ifclear CONLY
212 @ifclear MOD2
213 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C or C++.
214 @end ifclear
215 @ifset MOD2
216 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C, C++, and
217 Modula-2.
218 @end ifset
219 @ifset FORTRAN
220 @cindex Fortran
221 @value{GDBN} can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, although
222 it does not yet support entering expressions, printing values, etc.
223 using Fortran syntax. It may be necessary to refer to some variables
224 with a trailing underscore.
225 @end ifset
226 @end ifclear
227
228 @menu
229 * Free Software:: Freely redistributable software
230 * Contributors:: Contributors to GDB
231 @end menu
232
233 @node Free Software
234 @unnumberedsec Free software
235
236 @value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the GNU General Public License
237 (GPL). The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
238 program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
239 freedom to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to
240 the source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.
241 Typical software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the
242 Free Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.
243
244 Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says that
245 you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
246 from anyone else.
247
248 @node Contributors
249 @unnumberedsec Contributors to GDB
250
251 Richard Stallman was the original author of GDB, and of many other GNU
252 programs. Many others have contributed to its development. This
253 section attempts to credit major contributors. One of the virtues of
254 free software is that everyone is free to contribute to it; with
255 regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The file
256 @file{ChangeLog} in the GDB distribution approximates a blow-by-blow
257 account.
258
259 Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
260
261 @quotation
262 @emph{Plea:} Additions to this section are particularly welcome. If you
263 or your friends (or enemies, to be evenhanded) have been unfairly
264 omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!
265 @end quotation
266
267 So that they may not regard their long labor as thankless, we
268 particularly thank those who shepherded GDB through major releases: Fred
269 Fish (releases 4.11, 4.10, 4.9), Stu Grossman and John Gilmore (releases
270 4.8, 4.7, 4.6, 4.5, 4.4), John Gilmore (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and
271 3.9); Jim Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4, 3.3); and Randy Smith (releases
272 3.2, 3.1, 3.0). As major maintainer of GDB for some period, each
273 contributed significantly to the structure, stability, and capabilities
274 of the entire debugger.
275
276 Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Peter TerMaat, Chris
277 Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
278
279 @ifclear CONLY
280 Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the GNU C++ support in GDB,
281 with significant additional contributions from Per Bothner. James
282 Clark wrote the GNU C++ demangler. Early work on C++ was by Peter
283 TerMaat (who also did much general update work leading to release 3.0).
284 @end ifclear
285
286 GDB 4 uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
287 object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
288 Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
289
290 David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
291 the original support for encapsulated COFF.
292
293 Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
294 Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
295 support. Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support. Chris
296 Hanson improved the HP9000 support. Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki
297 Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support. David Johnson contributed
298 Encore Umax support. Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
299 Keith Packard contributed NS32K support. Doug Rabson contributed
300 Acorn Risc Machine support. Chris Smith contributed Convex support
301 (and Fortran debugging). Jonathan Stone contributed Pyramid support.
302 Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support. Tim Tucker contributed
303 support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode. Pace Willison
304 contributed Intel 386 support. Jay Vosburgh contributed Symmetry
305 support.
306
307 Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
308 libraries.
309
310 Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that GDB and GAS agree about
311 several machine instruction sets.
312
313 Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped
314 develop remote debugging. Intel Corporation and Wind River Systems
315 contributed remote debugging modules for their products.
316
317 Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
318 command-line editing and command history.
319
320 Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code,
321 @ifset MOD2
322 the Modula-2 support,
323 @end ifset
324 and contributed the Languages chapter of this manual.
325
326 Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
327 @ifclear CONLY
328 He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C++ overloaded
329 symbols.
330 @end ifclear
331
332 Hitachi America, Ltd. sponsored the support for Hitachi microprocessors.
333
334 @ifset NOVEL
335 @node New Features
336 @unnumbered New Features since GDB Version 3.5
337
338 @table @emph
339 @item Targets
340 Using the new command @code{target}, you can select at runtime whether
341 you are debugging local files, local processes, standalone systems over
342 a serial port, realtime systems over a TCP/IP connection, etc. The
343 command @code{load} can download programs into a remote system. Serial
344 stubs are available for Motorola 680x0, Intel 80386, and Sparc remote
345 systems; GDB also supports debugging realtime processes running under
346 VxWorks, using SunRPC Remote Procedure Calls over TCP/IP to talk to a
347 debugger stub on the target system. Internally, GDB now uses a function
348 vector to mediate access to different targets; if you need to add your
349 own support for a remote protocol, this makes it much easier.
350
351 @item Watchpoints
352 GDB now sports watchpoints as well as breakpoints. You can use a
353 watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an expression
354 changes, without having to predict a particular place in your program
355 where this may happen.
356
357 @item Wide Output
358 Commands that issue wide output now insert newlines at places designed
359 to make the output more readable.
360
361 @item Object Code Formats
362 GDB uses a new library called the Binary File Descriptor (BFD) Library
363 to permit it to switch dynamically, without reconfiguration or
364 recompilation, between different object-file formats. Formats currently
365 supported are COFF, ELF, a.out, Intel 960 b.out, MIPS ECOFF, HPPA SOM
366 (with stabs debugging), and S-records; files may be read as .o files,
367 archive libraries, or core dumps. BFD is available as a subroutine
368 library so that other programs may take advantage of it, and the other
369 GNU binary utilities are being converted to use it.
370
371 @item Configuration and Ports
372 Compile-time configuration (to select a particular architecture and
373 operating system) is much easier. The script @code{configure} now
374 allows you to configure GDB as either a native debugger or a
375 cross-debugger. @xref{Installing GDB}, for details on how to
376 configure.
377
378 @item Interaction
379 The user interface to the GDB control variables is simpler,
380 and is consolidated in two commands, @code{set} and @code{show}. Output
381 lines are now broken at readable places, rather than overflowing onto
382 the next line. You can suppress output of machine-level addresses,
383 displaying only source language information.
384
385 @item C++
386 GDB now supports C++ multiple inheritance (if used with a GCC
387 version 2 compiler), and also has limited support for C++ exception
388 handling, with the commands @code{catch} and @code{info catch}: GDB
389 can break when an exception is raised, before the stack is peeled back
390 to the exception handler's context.
391
392 @ifset MOD2
393 @item Modula-2
394 GDB now has preliminary support for the GNU Modula-2 compiler, currently
395 under development at the State University of New York at Buffalo.
396 Coordinated development of both GDB and the GNU Modula-2 compiler will
397 continue. Other Modula-2 compilers are currently not supported, and
398 attempting to debug programs compiled with them will likely result in an
399 error as the symbol table of the executable is read in.
400 @end ifset
401
402 @item Command Rationalization
403 Many GDB commands have been renamed to make them easier to remember
404 and use. In particular, the subcommands of @code{info} and
405 @code{show}/@code{set} are grouped to make the former refer to the state
406 of your program, and the latter refer to the state of GDB itself.
407 @xref{Renamed Commands}, for details on what commands were renamed.
408
409 @item Shared Libraries
410 GDB 4 can debug programs and core files that use SunOS, SVR4, or IBM RS/6000
411 shared libraries.
412
413 @item Reference Card
414 GDB 4 has a reference card. @xref{Formatting Documentation,,Formatting
415 the Documentation}, for instructions about how to print it.
416 @end table
417 @end ifset
418
419 @ifclear BARETARGET
420 @node Sample Session
421 @chapter A Sample @value{GDBN} Session
422
423 You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about @value{GDBN}.
424 However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
425 debugger. This chapter illustrates those commands.
426
427 @iftex
428 In this sample session, we emphasize user input like this: @b{input},
429 to make it easier to pick out from the surrounding output.
430 @end iftex
431
432 @c FIXME: this example may not be appropriate for some configs, where
433 @c FIXME...primary interest is in remote use.
434
435 One of the preliminary versions of GNU @code{m4} (a generic macro
436 processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
437 quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro
438 definition within another stop working. In the following short @code{m4}
439 session, we define a macro @code{foo} which expands to @code{0000}; we
440 then use the @code{m4} built-in @code{defn} to define @code{bar} as the
441 same thing. However, when we change the open quote string to
442 @code{<QUOTE>} and the close quote string to @code{<UNQUOTE>}, the same
443 procedure fails to define a new synonym @code{baz}:
444
445 @smallexample
446 $ @b{cd gnu/m4}
447 $ @b{./m4}
448 @b{define(foo,0000)}
449
450 @b{foo}
451 0000
452 @b{define(bar,defn(`foo'))}
453
454 @b{bar}
455 0000
456 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
457
458 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
459 @b{baz}
460 @b{C-d}
461 m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string
462 @end smallexample
463
464 @noindent
465 Let us use @value{GDBN} to try to see what is going on.
466
467 @smallexample
468 $ @b{@value{GDBP} m4}
469 @c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
470 @c FIXME... format to come out better.
471 GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
472 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
473 the conditions.
474 There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
475 for details.
476 GDB @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
477 (@value{GDBP})
478 @end smallexample
479
480 @noindent
481 @value{GDBN} reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the rest when
482 needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly. We now
483 tell @value{GDBN} to use a narrower display width than usual, so that examples
484 will fit in this manual.
485
486 @smallexample
487 (@value{GDBP}) @b{set width 70}
488 @end smallexample
489
490 @noindent
491 We need to see how the @code{m4} built-in @code{changequote} works.
492 Having looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
493 @code{m4_changequote}, so we set a breakpoint there with the @value{GDBN}
494 @code{break} command.
495
496 @smallexample
497 (@value{GDBP}) @b{break m4_changequote}
498 Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.
499 @end smallexample
500
501 @noindent
502 Using the @code{run} command, we start @code{m4} running under @value{GDBN}
503 control; as long as control does not reach the @code{m4_changequote}
504 subroutine, the program runs as usual:
505
506 @smallexample
507 (@value{GDBP}) @b{run}
508 Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
509 @b{define(foo,0000)}
510
511 @b{foo}
512 0000
513 @end smallexample
514
515 @noindent
516 To trigger the breakpoint, we call @code{changequote}. @value{GDBN}
517 suspends execution of @code{m4}, displaying information about the
518 context where it stops.
519
520 @smallexample
521 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
522
523 Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
524 at builtin.c:879
525 879 if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
526 @end smallexample
527
528 @noindent
529 Now we use the command @code{n} (@code{next}) to advance execution to
530 the next line of the current function.
531
532 @smallexample
533 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
534 882 set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
535 : nil,
536 @end smallexample
537
538 @noindent
539 @code{set_quotes} looks like a promising subroutine. We can go into it
540 by using the command @code{s} (@code{step}) instead of @code{next}.
541 @code{step} goes to the next line to be executed in @emph{any}
542 subroutine, so it steps into @code{set_quotes}.
543
544 @smallexample
545 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
546 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
547 at input.c:530
548 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
549 @end smallexample
550
551 @noindent
552 The display that shows the subroutine where @code{m4} is now
553 suspended (and its arguments) is called a stack frame display. It
554 shows a summary of the stack. We can use the @code{backtrace}
555 command (which can also be spelled @code{bt}), to see where we are
556 in the stack as a whole: the @code{backtrace} command displays a
557 stack frame for each active subroutine.
558
559 @smallexample
560 (@value{GDBP}) @b{bt}
561 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
562 at input.c:530
563 #1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
564 at builtin.c:882
565 #2 0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
566 #3 0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
567 at macro.c:71
568 #4 0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
569 #5 0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195
570 @end smallexample
571
572 @noindent
573 We will step through a few more lines to see what happens. The first two
574 times, we can use @samp{s}; the next two times we use @code{n} to avoid
575 falling into the @code{xstrdup} subroutine.
576
577 @smallexample
578 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
579 0x3b5c 532 if (rquote != def_rquote)
580 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
581 0x3b80 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? \
582 def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
583 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
584 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
585 : xstrdup(rq);
586 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
587 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
588 @end smallexample
589
590 @noindent
591 The last line displayed looks a little odd; we can examine the variables
592 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} to see if they are in fact the new left
593 and right quotes we specified. We use the command @code{p}
594 (@code{print}) to see their values.
595
596 @smallexample
597 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p lquote}
598 $1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
599 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p rquote}
600 $2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"
601 @end smallexample
602
603 @noindent
604 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} are indeed the new left and right quotes.
605 To look at some context, we can display ten lines of source
606 surrounding the current line with the @code{l} (@code{list}) command.
607
608 @smallexample
609 (@value{GDBP}) @b{l}
610 533 xfree(rquote);
611 534
612 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
613 : xstrdup (lq);
614 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
615 : xstrdup (rq);
616 537
617 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
618 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
619 540 @}
620 541
621 542 void
622 @end smallexample
623
624 @noindent
625 Let us step past the two lines that set @code{len_lquote} and
626 @code{len_rquote}, and then examine the values of those variables.
627
628 @smallexample
629 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
630 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
631 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
632 540 @}
633 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote}
634 $3 = 9
635 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote}
636 $4 = 7
637 @end smallexample
638
639 @noindent
640 That certainly looks wrong, assuming @code{len_lquote} and
641 @code{len_rquote} are meant to be the lengths of @code{lquote} and
642 @code{rquote} respectively. We can set them to better values using
643 the @code{p} command, since it can print the value of
644 any expression---and that expression can include subroutine calls and
645 assignments.
646
647 @smallexample
648 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)}
649 $5 = 7
650 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)}
651 $6 = 9
652 @end smallexample
653
654 @noindent
655 Is that enough to fix the problem of using the new quotes with the
656 @code{m4} built-in @code{defn}? We can allow @code{m4} to continue
657 executing with the @code{c} (@code{continue}) command, and then try the
658 example that caused trouble initially:
659
660 @smallexample
661 (@value{GDBP}) @b{c}
662 Continuing.
663
664 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
665
666 baz
667 0000
668 @end smallexample
669
670 @noindent
671 Success! The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones. The
672 problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
673 lengths. We allow @code{m4} exit by giving it an EOF as input:
674
675 @smallexample
676 @b{C-d}
677 Program exited normally.
678 @end smallexample
679
680 @noindent
681 The message @samp{Program exited normally.} is from @value{GDBN}; it
682 indicates @code{m4} has finished executing. We can end our @value{GDBN}
683 session with the @value{GDBN} @code{quit} command.
684
685 @smallexample
686 (@value{GDBP}) @b{quit}
687 @end smallexample
688 @end ifclear
689
690 @node Invocation
691 @chapter Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}
692
693 This chapter discusses how to start @value{GDBN}, and how to get out of it.
694 (The essentials: type @samp{@value{GDBP}} to start GDB, and type @kbd{quit}
695 or @kbd{C-d} to exit.)
696
697 @menu
698 * Invoking GDB:: How to start @value{GDBN}
699 * Quitting GDB:: How to quit @value{GDBN}
700 * Shell Commands:: How to use shell commands inside @value{GDBN}
701 @end menu
702
703 @node Invoking GDB
704 @section Invoking @value{GDBN}
705
706 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
707 For details on starting up @value{GDBP} as a
708 remote debugger attached to a Hitachi microprocessor, see @ref{Hitachi
709 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
710 @end ifset
711
712 Invoke @value{GDBN} by running the program @code{@value{GDBP}}. Once started,
713 @value{GDBN} reads commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.
714
715 You can also run @code{@value{GDBP}} with a variety of arguments and options,
716 to specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.
717
718 @ifset GENERIC
719 The command-line options described here are designed
720 to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
721 options may effectively be unavailable.
722 @end ifset
723
724 The most usual way to start @value{GDBN} is with one argument,
725 specifying an executable program:
726
727 @example
728 @value{GDBP} @var{program}
729 @end example
730
731 @ifclear BARETARGET
732 @noindent
733 You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
734 specified:
735
736 @example
737 @value{GDBP} @var{program} @var{core}
738 @end example
739
740 You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you want
741 to debug a running process:
742
743 @example
744 @value{GDBP} @var{program} 1234
745 @end example
746
747 @noindent
748 would attach @value{GDBN} to process @code{1234} (unless you also have a file
749 named @file{1234}; @value{GDBN} does check for a core file first).
750
751 Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
752 complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote debugger
753 attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of ``process'',
754 and there is often no way to get a core dump.
755 @end ifclear
756
757 @noindent
758 You can further control how @value{GDBN} starts up by using command-line
759 options. @value{GDBN} itself can remind you of the options available.
760
761 @noindent
762 Type
763
764 @example
765 @value{GDBP} -help
766 @end example
767
768 @noindent
769 to display all available options and briefly describe their use
770 (@samp{@value{GDBP} -h} is a shorter equivalent).
771
772 All options and command line arguments you give are processed
773 in sequential order. The order makes a difference when the
774 @samp{-x} option is used.
775
776
777 @menu
778 @ifclear GENERIC
779 @ifset REMOTESTUB
780 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
781 @end ifset
782 @ifset I960
783 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
784 @end ifset
785 @ifset AMD29K
786 * UDI29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K
787 * EB29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K
788 @end ifset
789 @ifset VXWORKS
790 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
791 @end ifset
792 @ifset ST2000
793 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
794 @end ifset
795 @ifset H8
796 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
797 @end ifset
798 @ifset MIPS
799 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
800 @end ifset
801 @ifset SIMS
802 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
803 @end ifset
804 @end ifclear
805 @c remnant makeinfo bug requires this blank line after *two* end-ifblahs:
806
807 * File Options:: Choosing files
808 * Mode Options:: Choosing modes
809 @end menu
810
811 @ifclear GENERIC
812 @include remote.texi
813 @end ifclear
814
815 @node File Options
816 @subsection Choosing files
817
818 @ifclear BARETARGET
819 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
820 specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID). This is
821 the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
822 @samp{-c} options respectively. (@value{GDBN} reads the first argument
823 that does not have an associated option flag as equivalent to the
824 @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the second argument
825 that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as equivalent to
826 the @samp{-c} option followed by that argument.)
827 @end ifclear
828 @ifset BARETARGET
829 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any argument other than options as
830 specifying an executable file. This is the same as if the argument was
831 specified by the @samp{-se} option.
832 @end ifset
833
834 Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
835 following list. @value{GDBN} also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
836 them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
837 (If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
838 than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
839
840 @table @code
841 @item -symbols @var{file}
842 @itemx -s @var{file}
843 Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
844
845 @item -exec @var{file}
846 @itemx -e @var{file}
847 Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when
848 @ifset BARETARGET
849 appropriate.
850 @end ifset
851 @ifclear BARETARGET
852 appropriate, and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core
853 dump.
854 @end ifclear
855
856 @item -se @var{file}
857 Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
858 file.
859
860 @ifclear BARETARGET
861 @item -core @var{file}
862 @itemx -c @var{file}
863 Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
864
865 @item -c @var{number}
866 Connect to process ID @var{number}, as with the @code{attach} command
867 (unless there is a file in core-dump format named @var{number}, in which
868 case @samp{-c} specifies that file as a core dump to read).
869 @end ifclear
870
871 @item -command @var{file}
872 @itemx -x @var{file}
873 Execute @value{GDBN} commands from file @var{file}. @xref{Command
874 Files,, Command files}.
875
876 @item -directory @var{directory}
877 @itemx -d @var{directory}
878 Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source files.
879
880 @ifclear BARETARGET
881 @item -m
882 @itemx -mapped
883 @emph{Warning: this option depends on operating system facilities that are not
884 supported on all systems.}@*
885 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the @code{mmap}
886 system call, you can use this option
887 to have @value{GDBN} write the symbols from your
888 program into a reusable file in the current directory. If the program you are debugging is
889 called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file will be @file{./fred.syms}.
890 Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions will notice the presence of this file,
891 and will quickly map in symbol information from it, rather than reading
892 the symbol table from the executable program.
893
894 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
895 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where @value{GDBN}
896 is run. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN} symbol
897 table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
898 @end ifclear
899
900 @item -r
901 @itemx -readnow
902 Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
903 the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
904 This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
905 @end table
906
907 @ifclear BARETARGET
908 The @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options are typically combined in
909 order to build a @file{.syms} file that contains complete symbol
910 information. (@xref{Files,,Commands to specify files}, for information
911 on @file{.syms} files.) A simple GDB invocation to do nothing but build
912 a @file{.syms} file for future use is:
913
914 @example
915 gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
916 @end example
917 @end ifclear
918
919 @node Mode Options
920 @subsection Choosing modes
921
922 You can run @value{GDBN} in various alternative modes---for example, in
923 batch mode or quiet mode.
924
925 @table @code
926 @item -nx
927 @itemx -n
928 Do not execute commands from any initialization files (normally called
929 @file{@value{GDBINIT}}). Normally, the commands in these files are
930 executed after all the command options and arguments have been
931 processed. @xref{Command Files,,Command files}.
932
933 @item -quiet
934 @itemx -q
935 ``Quiet''. Do not print the introductory and copyright messages. These
936 messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
937
938 @item -batch
939 Run in batch mode. Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the
940 command files specified with @samp{-x} (and all commands from
941 initialization files, if not inhibited with @samp{-n}). Exit with
942 nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the @value{GDBN} commands
943 in the command files.
944
945 Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for example to
946 download and run a program on another computer; in order to make this
947 more useful, the message
948
949 @example
950 Program exited normally.
951 @end example
952
953 @noindent
954 (which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under @value{GDBN} control
955 terminates) is not issued when running in batch mode.
956
957 @item -cd @var{directory}
958 Run @value{GDBN} using @var{directory} as its working directory,
959 instead of the current directory.
960
961 @ifset LUCID
962 @item -context @var{authentication}
963 When the Energize programming system starts up @value{GDBN}, it uses this
964 option to trigger an alternate mode of interaction.
965 @var{authentication} is a pair of numeric codes that identify @value{GDBN}
966 as a client in the Energize environment. Avoid this option when you run
967 @value{GDBN} directly from the command line. See @ref{Energize,,Using
968 @value{GDBN} with Energize} for more discussion of using @value{GDBN} with Energize.
969 @end ifset
970
971 @ifclear DOSHOST
972 @item -fullname
973 @itemx -f
974 Emacs sets this option when it runs @value{GDBN} as a subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN}
975 to output the full file name and line number in a standard,
976 recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is displayed (which
977 includes each time your program stops). This recognizable format looks
978 like two @samp{\032} characters, followed by the file name, line number
979 and character position separated by colons, and a newline. The
980 Emacs-to-@value{GDBN} interface program uses the two @samp{\032} characters as
981 a signal to display the source code for the frame.
982 @end ifclear
983
984 @ifset SERIAL
985 @item -b @var{bps}
986 Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
987 interface used by @value{GDBN} for remote debugging.
988
989 @item -tty @var{device}
990 Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
991 @c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty. Investigate.
992 @end ifset
993 @end table
994
995 @node Quitting GDB
996 @section Quitting @value{GDBN}
997 @cindex exiting @value{GDBN}
998 @cindex leaving @value{GDBN}
999
1000 @table @code
1001 @item quit
1002 @kindex quit
1003 @kindex q
1004 To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated @code{q}), or type
1005 an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}).
1006 @end table
1007
1008 @cindex interrupt
1009 An interrupt (often @kbd{C-c}) will not exit from @value{GDBN}, but rather
1010 will terminate the action of any @value{GDBN} command that is in progress and
1011 return to @value{GDBN} command level. It is safe to type the interrupt
1012 character at any time because @value{GDBN} does not allow it to take effect
1013 until a time when it is safe.
1014
1015 @ifclear BARETARGET
1016 If you have been using @value{GDBN} to control an attached process or
1017 device, you can release it with the @code{detach} command
1018 (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an already-running process}).
1019 @end ifclear
1020
1021 @node Shell Commands
1022 @section Shell commands
1023
1024 If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your
1025 debugging session, there is no need to leave or suspend @value{GDBN}; you can
1026 just use the @code{shell} command.
1027
1028 @table @code
1029 @item shell @var{command string}
1030 @kindex shell
1031 @cindex shell escape
1032 Invoke a the standard shell to execute @var{command string}.
1033 @ifclear DOSHOST
1034 If it exists, the environment variable @code{SHELL} determines which
1035 shell to run. Otherwise @value{GDBN} uses @code{/bin/sh}.
1036 @end ifclear
1037 @end table
1038
1039 The utility @code{make} is often needed in development environments.
1040 You do not have to use the @code{shell} command for this purpose in
1041 @value{GDBN}:
1042
1043 @table @code
1044 @item make @var{make-args}
1045 @kindex make
1046 @cindex calling make
1047 Execute the @code{make} program with the specified
1048 arguments. This is equivalent to @samp{shell make @var{make-args}}.
1049 @end table
1050
1051 @node Commands
1052 @chapter @value{GDBN} Commands
1053
1054 You can abbreviate a @value{GDBN} command to the first few letters of the command
1055 name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
1056 @value{GDBN} commands by typing just @key{RET}. You can also use the @key{TAB}
1057 key to get @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to
1058 show you the alternatives available, if there is more than one possibility).
1059
1060 @menu
1061 * Command Syntax:: How to give commands to @value{GDBN}
1062 * Completion:: Command completion
1063 * Help:: How to ask @value{GDBN} for help
1064 @end menu
1065
1066 @node Command Syntax
1067 @section Command syntax
1068
1069 A @value{GDBN} command is a single line of input. There is no limit on
1070 how long it can be. It starts with a command name, which is followed by
1071 arguments whose meaning depends on the command name. For example, the
1072 command @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to
1073 step, as in @samp{step 5}. You can also use the @code{step} command
1074 with no arguments. Some command names do not allow any arguments.
1075
1076 @cindex abbreviation
1077 @value{GDBN} command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
1078 unambiguous. Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
1079 documentation for individual commands. In some cases, even ambiguous
1080 abbreviations are allowed; for example, @code{s} is specially defined as
1081 equivalent to @code{step} even though there are other commands whose
1082 names start with @code{s}. You can test abbreviations by using them as
1083 arguments to the @code{help} command.
1084
1085 @cindex repeating commands
1086 @kindex RET
1087 A blank line as input to @value{GDBN} (typing just @key{RET}) means to
1088 repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
1089 will not repeat this way; these are commands for which unintentional
1090 repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
1091 repeat.
1092
1093 The @code{list} and @code{x} commands, when you repeat them with
1094 @key{RET}, construct new arguments rather than repeating
1095 exactly as typed. This permits easy scanning of source or memory.
1096
1097 @value{GDBN} can also use @key{RET} in another way: to partition lengthy
1098 output, in a way similar to the common utility @code{more}
1099 (@pxref{Screen Size,,Screen size}). Since it is easy to press one
1100 @key{RET} too many in this situation, @value{GDBN} disables command
1101 repetition after any command that generates this sort of display.
1102
1103 @kindex #
1104 @cindex comment
1105 Any text from a @kbd{#} to the end of the line is a comment; it does
1106 nothing. This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command
1107 Files,,Command files}).
1108
1109 @node Completion
1110 @section Command completion
1111
1112 @cindex completion
1113 @cindex word completion
1114 @value{GDBN} can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there is
1115 only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
1116 are for the next word in a command, at any time. This works for @value{GDBN}
1117 commands, @value{GDBN} subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.
1118
1119 Press the @key{TAB} key whenever you want @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest
1120 of a word. If there is only one possibility, @value{GDBN} will fill in the
1121 word, and wait for you to finish the command (or press @key{RET} to
1122 enter it). For example, if you type
1123
1124 @c FIXME "@key" does not distinguish its argument sufficiently to permit
1125 @c complete accuracy in these examples; space introduced for clarity.
1126 @c If texinfo enhancements make it unnecessary, it would be nice to
1127 @c replace " @key" by "@key" in the following...
1128 @example
1129 (@value{GDBP}) info bre @key{TAB}
1130 @end example
1131
1132 @noindent
1133 @value{GDBN} fills in the rest of the word @samp{breakpoints}, since that is
1134 the only @code{info} subcommand beginning with @samp{bre}:
1135
1136 @example
1137 (@value{GDBP}) info breakpoints
1138 @end example
1139
1140 @noindent
1141 You can either press @key{RET} at this point, to run the @code{info
1142 breakpoints} command, or backspace and enter something else, if
1143 @samp{breakpoints} does not look like the command you expected. (If you
1144 were sure you wanted @code{info breakpoints} in the first place, you
1145 might as well just type @key{RET} immediately after @samp{info bre},
1146 to exploit command abbreviations rather than command completion).
1147
1148 If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you press
1149 @key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} will sound a bell. You can either supply more
1150 characters and try again, or just press @key{TAB} a second time, and
1151 @value{GDBN} will display all the possible completions for that word. For
1152 example, you might want to set a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name
1153 begins with @samp{make_}, but when you type @kbd{b make_@key{TAB}} @value{GDBN}
1154 just sounds the bell. Typing @key{TAB} again will display all the
1155 function names in your program that begin with those characters, for
1156 example:
1157
1158 @example
1159 (@value{GDBP}) b make_ @key{TAB}
1160 @exdent @value{GDBN} sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
1161 make_a_section_from_file make_environ
1162 make_abs_section make_function_type
1163 make_blockvector make_pointer_type
1164 make_cleanup make_reference_type
1165 make_command make_symbol_completion_list
1166 (@value{GDBP}) b make_
1167 @end example
1168
1169 @noindent
1170 After displaying the available possibilities, @value{GDBN} copies your
1171 partial input (@samp{b make_} in the example) so you can finish the
1172 command.
1173
1174 If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
1175 can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
1176 means @kbd{@key{META} ?}. You can type this
1177 @ifclear DOSHOST
1178 either by holding down a
1179 key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
1180 one) while typing @kbd{?}, or
1181 @end ifclear
1182 as @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
1183
1184 @cindex quotes in commands
1185 @cindex completion of quoted strings
1186 Sometimes the string you need, while logically a ``word'', may contain
1187 parentheses or other characters that @value{GDBN} normally excludes from its
1188 notion of a word. To permit word completion to work in this situation,
1189 you may enclose words in @code{'} (single quote marks) in @value{GDBN} commands.
1190
1191 @ifclear CONLY
1192 The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
1193 name of a C++ function. This is because C++ allows function overloading
1194 (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished by argument
1195 type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you may need to
1196 distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name} that takes an
1197 @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version that takes a
1198 @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the word-completion
1199 facilities in this situation, type a single quote @code{'} at the
1200 beginning of the function name. This alerts @value{GDBN} that it may need to
1201 consider more information than usual when you press @key{TAB} or
1202 @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
1203
1204 @example
1205 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @key{M-?}
1206 bubble(double,double) bubble(int,int)
1207 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1208 @end example
1209
1210 In some cases, @value{GDBN} can tell that completing a name will require
1211 quotes. When this happens, @value{GDBN} will insert the quote for you (while
1212 completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
1213 place:
1214
1215 @example
1216 (@value{GDBP}) b bub @key{TAB}
1217 @exdent @value{GDBN} alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
1218 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1219 @end example
1220
1221 @noindent
1222 In general, @value{GDBN} can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if
1223 you have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
1224 completion on an overloaded symbol.
1225 @end ifclear
1226
1227
1228 @node Help
1229 @section Getting help
1230 @cindex online documentation
1231 @kindex help
1232
1233 You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands, using the
1234 command @code{help}.
1235
1236 @table @code
1237 @item help
1238 @itemx h
1239 @kindex h
1240 You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
1241 display a short list of named classes of commands:
1242
1243 @smallexample
1244 (@value{GDBP}) help
1245 List of classes of commands:
1246
1247 running -- Running the program
1248 stack -- Examining the stack
1249 data -- Examining data
1250 breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
1251 files -- Specifying and examining files
1252 status -- Status inquiries
1253 support -- Support facilities
1254 user-defined -- User-defined commands
1255 aliases -- Aliases of other commands
1256 obscure -- Obscure features
1257
1258 Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
1259 commands in that class.
1260 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1261 documentation.
1262 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1263 (@value{GDBP})
1264 @end smallexample
1265
1266 @item help @var{class}
1267 Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
1268 list of the individual commands in that class. For example, here is the
1269 help display for the class @code{status}:
1270
1271 @smallexample
1272 (@value{GDBP}) help status
1273 Status inquiries.
1274
1275 List of commands:
1276
1277 @c Line break in "show" line falsifies real output, but needed
1278 @c to fit in smallbook page size.
1279 show -- Generic command for showing things set
1280 with "set"
1281 info -- Generic command for printing status
1282
1283 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1284 documentation.
1285 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1286 (@value{GDBP})
1287 @end smallexample
1288
1289 @item help @var{command}
1290 With a command name as @code{help} argument, @value{GDBN} will display a
1291 short paragraph on how to use that command.
1292 @end table
1293
1294 In addition to @code{help}, you can use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{info}
1295 and @code{show} to inquire about the state of your program, or the state
1296 of @value{GDBN} itself. Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this
1297 manual introduces each of them in the appropriate context. The listings
1298 under @code{info} and under @code{show} in the Index point to
1299 all the sub-commands. @xref{Index}.
1300
1301 @c @group
1302 @table @code
1303 @item info
1304 @kindex info
1305 @kindex i
1306 This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
1307 program. For example, you can list the arguments given to your program
1308 with @code{info args}, list the registers currently in use with @code{info
1309 registers}, or list the breakpoints you have set with @code{info breakpoints}.
1310 You can get a complete list of the @code{info} sub-commands with
1311 @w{@code{help info}}.
1312
1313 @kindex show
1314 @item show
1315 In contrast, @code{show} is for describing the state of @value{GDBN} itself.
1316 You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
1317 related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
1318 system is used for displays with @code{set radix}, or simply inquire
1319 which is currently in use with @code{show radix}.
1320
1321 @kindex info set
1322 To display all the settable parameters and their current
1323 values, you can use @code{show} with no arguments; you may also use
1324 @code{info set}. Both commands produce the same display.
1325 @c FIXME: "info set" violates the rule that "info" is for state of
1326 @c FIXME...program. Ck w/ GNU: "info set" to be called something else,
1327 @c FIXME...or change desc of rule---eg "state of prog and debugging session"?
1328 @end table
1329 @c @end group
1330
1331 Here are three miscellaneous @code{show} subcommands, all of which are
1332 exceptional in lacking corresponding @code{set} commands:
1333
1334 @table @code
1335 @kindex show version
1336 @cindex version number
1337 @item show version
1338 Show what version of @value{GDBN} is running. You should include this
1339 information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports. If multiple versions of @value{GDBN} are in
1340 use at your site, you may occasionally want to determine which version
1341 of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new commands are introduced,
1342 and old ones may wither away. The version number is also announced
1343 when you start @value{GDBN}.
1344
1345 @kindex show copying
1346 @item show copying
1347 Display information about permission for copying @value{GDBN}.
1348
1349 @kindex show warranty
1350 @item show warranty
1351 Display the GNU ``NO WARRANTY'' statement.
1352 @end table
1353
1354 @node Running
1355 @chapter Running Programs Under @value{GDBN}
1356
1357 When you run a program under @value{GDBN}, you must first generate
1358 debugging information when you compile it.
1359 @ifclear BARETARGET
1360 You may start it with its arguments, if any, in an environment of your
1361 choice. You may redirect your program's input and output, debug an
1362 already running process, or kill a child process.
1363 @end ifclear
1364
1365 @menu
1366 * Compilation:: Compiling for debugging
1367 * Starting:: Starting your program
1368 @ifclear BARETARGET
1369 * Arguments:: Your program's arguments
1370 * Environment:: Your program's environment
1371 * Working Directory:: Your program's working directory
1372 * Input/Output:: Your program's input and output
1373 * Attach:: Debugging an already-running process
1374 * Kill Process:: Killing the child process
1375 * Process Information:: Additional process information
1376 @end ifclear
1377 @end menu
1378
1379 @node Compilation
1380 @section Compiling for debugging
1381
1382 In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate
1383 debugging information when you compile it. This debugging information
1384 is stored in the object file; it describes the data type of each
1385 variable or function and the correspondence between source line numbers
1386 and addresses in the executable code.
1387
1388 To request debugging information, specify the @samp{-g} option when you run
1389 the compiler.
1390
1391 Many C compilers are unable to handle the @samp{-g} and @samp{-O}
1392 options together. Using those compilers, you cannot generate optimized
1393 executables containing debugging information.
1394
1395 @value{NGCC}, the GNU C compiler, supports @samp{-g} with or without
1396 @samp{-O}, making it possible to debug optimized code. We recommend
1397 that you @emph{always} use @samp{-g} whenever you compile a program.
1398 You may think your program is correct, but there is no sense in pushing
1399 your luck.
1400
1401 @cindex optimized code, debugging
1402 @cindex debugging optimized code
1403 When you debug a program compiled with @samp{-g -O}, remember that the
1404 optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger will show you what is
1405 really there. Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
1406 exactly match your source file! An extreme example: if you define a
1407 variable, but never use it, @value{GDBN} will never see that
1408 variable---because the compiler optimizes it out of existence.
1409
1410 Some things do not work as well with @samp{-g -O} as with just
1411 @samp{-g}, particularly on machines with instruction scheduling. If in
1412 doubt, recompile with @samp{-g} alone, and if this fixes the problem,
1413 please report it as a bug (including a test case!).
1414
1415 Older versions of the GNU C compiler permitted a variant option
1416 @w{@samp{-gg}} for debugging information. @value{GDBN} no longer supports this
1417 format; if your GNU C compiler has this option, do not use it.
1418
1419 @need 2000
1420 @node Starting
1421 @section Starting your program
1422 @cindex starting
1423 @cindex running
1424
1425 @table @code
1426 @item run
1427 @itemx r
1428 @kindex run
1429 Use the @code{run} command to start your program under @value{GDBN}. You must
1430 first specify the program name
1431 @ifset VXWORKS
1432 (except on VxWorks)
1433 @end ifset
1434 with an argument to @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation, ,Getting In and
1435 Out of @value{GDBN}}), or by using the @code{file} or @code{exec-file}
1436 command (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
1437
1438 @end table
1439
1440 @ifclear BARETARGET
1441 If you are running your program in an execution environment that
1442 supports processes, @code{run} creates an inferior process and makes
1443 that process run your program. (In environments without processes,
1444 @code{run} jumps to the start of your program.)
1445
1446 The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
1447 receives from its superior. @value{GDBN} provides ways to specify this
1448 information, which you must do @emph{before} starting your program. (You
1449 can change it after starting your program, but such changes will only affect
1450 your program the next time you start it.) This information may be
1451 divided into four categories:
1452
1453 @table @asis
1454 @item The @emph{arguments.}
1455 Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
1456 @code{run} command. If a shell is available on your target, the shell
1457 is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal conventions
1458 (such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution) in describing
1459 the arguments. In Unix systems, you can control which shell is used
1460 with the @code{SHELL} environment variable. @xref{Arguments, ,Your
1461 program's arguments}.
1462
1463 @item The @emph{environment.}
1464 Your program normally inherits its environment from @value{GDBN}, but you can
1465 use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{set environment} and @code{unset
1466 environment} to change parts of the environment that will be given to
1467 your program. @xref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}.
1468
1469 @item The @emph{working directory.}
1470 Your program inherits its working directory from @value{GDBN}. You can set
1471 the @value{GDBN} working directory with the @code{cd} command in @value{GDBN}.
1472 @xref{Working Directory, ,Your program's working directory}.
1473
1474 @item The @emph{standard input and output.}
1475 Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
1476 standard output as @value{GDBN} is using. You can redirect input and output
1477 in the @code{run} command line, or you can use the @code{tty} command to
1478 set a different device for your program.
1479 @xref{Input/Output, ,Your program's input and output}.
1480
1481 @cindex pipes
1482 @emph{Warning:} While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
1483 pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to another
1484 program; if you attempt this, @value{GDBN} is likely to wind up debugging the
1485 wrong program.
1486 @end table
1487 @end ifclear
1488
1489 When you issue the @code{run} command, your program begins to execute
1490 immediately. @xref{Stopping, ,Stopping and continuing}, for discussion
1491 of how to arrange for your program to stop. Once your program has
1492 stopped, you may call functions in your program, using the @code{print}
1493 or @code{call} commands. @xref{Data, ,Examining Data}.
1494
1495 If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the
1496 last time @value{GDBN} read its symbols, @value{GDBN} will discard its symbol table and
1497 re-read it. When it does this, @value{GDBN} tries to retain your current
1498 breakpoints.
1499
1500 @ifclear BARETARGET
1501 @node Arguments
1502 @section Your program's arguments
1503
1504 @cindex arguments (to your program)
1505 The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
1506 @code{run} command. They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard
1507 characters and performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program.
1508 Your @code{SHELL} environment variable (if it exists) specifies what
1509 shell @value{GDBN} if you do not define @code{SHELL}, @value{GDBN} uses
1510 @code{/bin/sh}.
1511
1512 @code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
1513 @code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
1514
1515 @kindex set args
1516 @table @code
1517 @item set args
1518 Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run. If
1519 @code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} will execute your program
1520 with no arguments. Once you have run your program with arguments,
1521 using @code{set args} before the next @code{run} is the only way to run
1522 it again without arguments.
1523
1524 @item show args
1525 @kindex show args
1526 Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.
1527 @end table
1528
1529 @node Environment
1530 @section Your program's environment
1531
1532 @cindex environment (of your program)
1533 The @dfn{environment} consists of a set of environment variables and
1534 their values. Environment variables conventionally record such things as
1535 your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
1536 path for programs to run. Usually you set up environment variables with
1537 the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run. When
1538 debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a modified
1539 environment without having to start @value{GDBN} over again.
1540
1541 @table @code
1542 @item path @var{directory}
1543 @kindex path
1544 Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
1545 (the search path for executables), for both @value{GDBN} and your program.
1546 You may specify several directory names, separated by @samp{:} or
1547 whitespace. If @var{directory} is already in the path, it is moved to
1548 the front, so it will be searched sooner.
1549
1550 You can use the string @samp{$cwd} to refer to whatever is the current
1551 working directory at the time @value{GDBN} searches the path. If you
1552 use @samp{.} instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
1553 @code{path} command. @value{GDBN} replaces @samp{.} in the
1554 @var{directory} argument (with the current path) before adding
1555 @var{directory} to the search path.
1556 @c 'path' is explicitly nonrepeatable, but RMS points out it is silly to
1557 @c document that, since repeating it would be a no-op.
1558
1559 @item show paths
1560 @kindex show paths
1561 Display the list of search paths for executables (the @code{PATH}
1562 environment variable).
1563
1564 @item show environment @r{[}@var{varname}@r{]}
1565 @kindex show environment
1566 Print the value of environment variable @var{varname} to be given to
1567 your program when it starts. If you do not supply @var{varname},
1568 print the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
1569 your program. You can abbreviate @code{environment} as @code{env}.
1570
1571 @item set environment @var{varname} @r{[}=@r{]} @var{value}
1572 @kindex set environment
1573 Set environment variable @var{varname} to @var{value}. The value
1574 changes for your program only, not for @value{GDBN} itself. @var{value} may
1575 be any string; the values of environment variables are just strings, and
1576 any interpretation is supplied by your program itself. The @var{value}
1577 parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to a
1578 null value.
1579 @c "any string" here does not include leading, trailing
1580 @c blanks. Gnu asks: does anyone care?
1581
1582 For example, this command:
1583
1584 @example
1585 set env USER = foo
1586 @end example
1587
1588 @noindent
1589 tells a Unix program, when subsequently run, that its user is named
1590 @samp{foo}. (The spaces around @samp{=} are used for clarity here; they
1591 are not actually required.)
1592
1593 @item unset environment @var{varname}
1594 @kindex unset environment
1595 Remove variable @var{varname} from the environment to be passed to your
1596 program. This is different from @samp{set env @var{varname} =};
1597 @code{unset environment} removes the variable from the environment,
1598 rather than assigning it an empty value.
1599 @end table
1600
1601 @emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} runs your program using the shell indicated
1602 by your @code{SHELL} environment variable if it exists (or
1603 @code{/bin/sh} if not). If your @code{SHELL} variable names a shell
1604 that runs an initialization file---such as @file{.cshrc} for C-shell, or
1605 @file{.bashrc} for BASH---any variables you set in that file will affect
1606 your program. You may wish to move setting of environment variables to
1607 files that are only run when you sign on, such as @file{.login} or
1608 @file{.profile}.
1609
1610 @node Working Directory
1611 @section Your program's working directory
1612
1613 @cindex working directory (of your program)
1614 Each time you start your program with @code{run}, it inherits its
1615 working directory from the current working directory of @value{GDBN}.
1616 The @value{GDBN} working directory is initially whatever it inherited
1617 from its parent process (typically the shell), but you can specify a new
1618 working directory in @value{GDBN} with the @code{cd} command.
1619
1620 The @value{GDBN} working directory also serves as a default for the commands
1621 that specify files for @value{GDBN} to operate on. @xref{Files, ,Commands to
1622 specify files}.
1623
1624 @table @code
1625 @item cd @var{directory}
1626 @kindex cd
1627 Set the @value{GDBN} working directory to @var{directory}.
1628
1629 @item pwd
1630 @kindex pwd
1631 Print the @value{GDBN} working directory.
1632 @end table
1633
1634 @node Input/Output
1635 @section Your program's input and output
1636
1637 @cindex redirection
1638 @cindex i/o
1639 @cindex terminal
1640 By default, the program you run under @value{GDBN} does input and output to
1641 the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses. @value{GDBN} switches the terminal to
1642 its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
1643 modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
1644 running your program.
1645
1646 @table @code
1647 @item info terminal
1648 @kindex info terminal
1649 Displays information recorded by @value{GDBN} about the terminal modes your
1650 program is using.
1651 @end table
1652
1653 You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
1654 redirection with the @code{run} command. For example,
1655
1656 @example
1657 run > outfile
1658 @end example
1659
1660 @noindent
1661 starts your program, diverting its output to the file @file{outfile}.
1662
1663 @kindex tty
1664 @cindex controlling terminal
1665 Another way to specify where your program should do input and output is
1666 with the @code{tty} command. This command accepts a file name as
1667 argument, and causes this file to be the default for future @code{run}
1668 commands. It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
1669 process, for future @code{run} commands. For example,
1670
1671 @example
1672 tty /dev/ttyb
1673 @end example
1674
1675 @noindent
1676 directs that processes started with subsequent @code{run} commands
1677 default to do input and output on the terminal @file{/dev/ttyb} and have
1678 that as their controlling terminal.
1679
1680 An explicit redirection in @code{run} overrides the @code{tty} command's
1681 effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
1682 terminal.
1683
1684 When you use the @code{tty} command or redirect input in the @code{run}
1685 command, only the input @emph{for your program} is affected. The input
1686 for @value{GDBN} still comes from your terminal.
1687
1688 @node Attach
1689 @section Debugging an already-running process
1690 @kindex attach
1691 @cindex attach
1692
1693 @table @code
1694 @item attach @var{process-id}
1695 This command attaches to a running process---one that was started
1696 outside @value{GDBN}. (@code{info files} will show your active
1697 targets.) The command takes as argument a process ID. The usual way to
1698 find out the process-id of a Unix process is with the @code{ps} utility,
1699 or with the @samp{jobs -l} shell command.
1700
1701 @code{attach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} a second time after
1702 executing the command.
1703 @end table
1704
1705 To use @code{attach}, your program must be running in an environment
1706 which supports processes; for example, @code{attach} does not work for
1707 programs on bare-board targets that lack an operating system. You must
1708 also have permission to send the process a signal.
1709
1710 When using @code{attach}, you should first use the @code{file} command
1711 to specify the program running in the process and load its symbol table.
1712 @xref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}.
1713
1714 The first thing @value{GDBN} does after arranging to debug the specified
1715 process is to stop it. You can examine and modify an attached process
1716 with all the @value{GDBN} commands that are ordinarily available when you start
1717 processes with @code{run}. You can insert breakpoints; you can step and
1718 continue; you can modify storage. If you would rather the process
1719 continue running, you may use the @code{continue} command after
1720 attaching @value{GDBN} to the process.
1721
1722 @table @code
1723 @item detach
1724 @kindex detach
1725 When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use the
1726 @code{detach} command to release it from @value{GDBN} control. Detaching
1727 the process continues its execution. After the @code{detach} command,
1728 that process and @value{GDBN} become completely independent once more, and you
1729 are ready to @code{attach} another process or start one with @code{run}.
1730 @code{detach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
1731 executing the command.
1732 @end table
1733
1734 If you exit @value{GDBN} or use the @code{run} command while you have an attached
1735 process, you kill that process. By default, you will be asked for
1736 confirmation if you try to do either of these things; you can control
1737 whether or not you need to confirm by using the @code{set confirm} command
1738 (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and messages}).
1739
1740 @node Kill Process
1741 @c @group
1742 @section Killing the child process
1743
1744 @table @code
1745 @item kill
1746 @kindex kill
1747 Kill the child process in which your program is running under @value{GDBN}.
1748 @end table
1749
1750 This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
1751 running process. @value{GDBN} ignores any core dump file while your program
1752 is running.
1753 @c @end group
1754
1755 On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside @value{GDBN}
1756 while you have breakpoints set on it inside @value{GDBN}. You can use the
1757 @code{kill} command in this situation to permit running your program
1758 outside the debugger.
1759
1760 The @code{kill} command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
1761 relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
1762 executable file while it is running in a process. In this case, when you
1763 next type @code{run}, @value{GDBN} will notice that the file has changed, and
1764 will re-read the symbol table (while trying to preserve your current
1765 breakpoint settings).
1766
1767 @node Process Information
1768 @section Additional process information
1769
1770 @kindex /proc
1771 @cindex process image
1772 Some operating systems provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can
1773 be used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
1774 subroutines. If @value{GDBN} is configured for an operating system with this
1775 facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on several
1776 kinds of information about the process running your program.
1777
1778 @table @code
1779 @item info proc
1780 @kindex info proc
1781 Summarize available information about the process.
1782
1783 @item info proc mappings
1784 @kindex info proc mappings
1785 Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
1786 on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
1787
1788 @item info proc times
1789 @kindex info proc times
1790 Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
1791 its children.
1792
1793 @item info proc id
1794 @kindex info proc id
1795 Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
1796 the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
1797
1798 @item info proc status
1799 @kindex info proc status
1800 General information on the state of the process. If the process is
1801 stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
1802 received.
1803
1804 @item info proc all
1805 Show all the above information about the process.
1806 @end table
1807 @end ifclear
1808
1809 @node Stopping
1810 @chapter Stopping and Continuing
1811
1812 The principal purposes of using a debugger are so that you can stop your
1813 program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
1814 trouble, you can investigate and find out why.
1815
1816 Inside @value{GDBN}, your program may stop for any of several reasons, such
1817 as
1818 @ifclear BARETARGET
1819 a signal,
1820 @end ifclear
1821 a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a @value{GDBN}
1822 command such as @code{step}. You may then examine and change
1823 variables, set new breakpoints or remove old ones, and then continue
1824 execution. Usually, the messages shown by @value{GDBN} provide ample
1825 explanation of the status of your program---but you can also explicitly
1826 request this information at any time.
1827
1828 @table @code
1829 @item info program
1830 @kindex info program
1831 Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
1832 running or not,
1833 @ifclear BARETARGET
1834 what process it is,
1835 @end ifclear
1836 and why it stopped.
1837 @end table
1838
1839 @menu
1840 @ifclear CONLY
1841 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
1842 @end ifclear
1843 @ifset CONLY
1844 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints and watchpoints
1845 @end ifset
1846 @c Remnant makeinfo bug requires blank line after *successful* end-if in menu:
1847
1848 * Continuing and Stepping:: Resuming execution
1849 @ifset POSIX
1850 * Signals:: Signals
1851 @end ifset
1852 @end menu
1853
1854 @c makeinfo node-defaulting requires adjacency of @node and sectioning cmds
1855 @c ...hence distribute @node Breakpoints over two possible @if expansions.
1856 @c
1857 @ifclear CONLY
1858 @node Breakpoints
1859 @section Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
1860 @end ifclear
1861 @ifset CONLY
1862 @node Breakpoints
1863 @section Breakpoints and watchpoints
1864 @end ifset
1865
1866 @cindex breakpoints
1867 A @dfn{breakpoint} makes your program stop whenever a certain point in
1868 the program is reached. For each breakpoint, you can add various
1869 conditions to control in finer detail whether your program will stop.
1870 You can set breakpoints with the @code{break} command and its variants
1871 (@pxref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}), to specify the place where
1872 your program should stop by line number, function name or exact address
1873 in the program.
1874 @ifclear CONLY
1875 In languages with exception handling (such as GNU C++), you can also set
1876 breakpoints where an exception is raised (@pxref{Exception Handling,
1877 ,Breakpoints and exceptions}).
1878 @end ifclear
1879
1880 @cindex watchpoints
1881 @cindex memory tracing
1882 @cindex breakpoint on memory address
1883 @cindex breakpoint on variable modification
1884 A @dfn{watchpoint} is a special breakpoint that stops your program
1885 when the value of an expression changes. You must use a different
1886 command to set watchpoints (@pxref{Set Watchpoints, ,Setting
1887 watchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a watchpoint like
1888 any other breakpoint: you enable, disable, and delete both breakpoints
1889 and watchpoints using the same commands.
1890
1891 You can arrange to have values from your program displayed automatically
1892 whenever @value{GDBN} stops at a breakpoint. @xref{Auto Display,
1893 ,Automatic display}.
1894
1895 @cindex breakpoint numbers
1896 @cindex numbers for breakpoints
1897 @value{GDBN} assigns a number to each breakpoint or watchpoint when you
1898 create it; these numbers are successive integers starting with one. In
1899 many of the commands for controlling various features of breakpoints you
1900 use the breakpoint number to say which breakpoint you want to change.
1901 Each breakpoint may be @dfn{enabled} or @dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has
1902 no effect on your program until you enable it again.
1903
1904 @menu
1905 * Set Breaks:: Setting breakpoints
1906 * Set Watchpoints:: Setting watchpoints
1907 @ifclear CONLY
1908 * Exception Handling:: Breakpoints and exceptions
1909 @end ifclear
1910
1911 * Delete Breaks:: Deleting breakpoints
1912 * Disabling:: Disabling breakpoints
1913 * Conditions:: Break conditions
1914 * Break Commands:: Breakpoint command lists
1915 @ifclear CONLY
1916 * Breakpoint Menus:: Breakpoint menus
1917 @end ifclear
1918 @ifclear BARETARGET
1919 * Error in Breakpoints:: ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
1920 @end ifclear
1921 @end menu
1922
1923 @node Set Breaks
1924 @subsection Setting breakpoints
1925
1926 @c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
1927 @c consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
1928 @c
1929 @c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
1930
1931 @kindex break
1932 @kindex b
1933 @kindex $bpnum
1934 @cindex latest breakpoint
1935 Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
1936 @code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
1937 number of the beakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
1938 Vars,, Convenience variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
1939 convenience variables.
1940
1941 You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.
1942
1943 @table @code
1944 @item break @var{function}
1945 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
1946 @ifclear CONLY
1947 When using source languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as
1948 C++, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
1949 @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
1950 @end ifclear
1951
1952 @item break +@var{offset}
1953 @itemx break -@var{offset}
1954 Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
1955 at which execution stopped in the currently selected frame.
1956
1957 @item break @var{linenum}
1958 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
1959 That file is the last file whose source text was printed. This
1960 breakpoint will stop your program just before it executes any of the
1961 code on that line.
1962
1963 @item break @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
1964 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in source file @var{filename}.
1965
1966 @item break @var{filename}:@var{function}
1967 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function} found in file
1968 @var{filename}. Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
1969 superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
1970 functions.
1971
1972 @item break *@var{address}
1973 Set a breakpoint at address @var{address}. You can use this to set
1974 breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
1975 information or source files.
1976
1977 @item break
1978 When called without any arguments, @code{break} sets a breakpoint at
1979 the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
1980 (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the Stack}). In any selected frame but the
1981 innermost, this will cause your program to stop as soon as control
1982 returns to that frame. This is similar to the effect of a
1983 @code{finish} command in the frame inside the selected frame---except
1984 that @code{finish} does not leave an active breakpoint. If you use
1985 @code{break} without an argument in the innermost frame, @value{GDBN} will stop
1986 the next time it reaches the current location; this may be useful
1987 inside loops.
1988
1989 @value{GDBN} normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until at
1990 least one instruction has been executed. If it did not do this, you
1991 would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without first disabling the
1992 breakpoint. This rule applies whether or not the breakpoint already
1993 existed when your program stopped.
1994
1995 @item break @dots{} if @var{cond}
1996 Set a breakpoint with condition @var{cond}; evaluate the expression
1997 @var{cond} each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the
1998 value is nonzero---that is, if @var{cond} evaluates as true.
1999 @samp{@dots{}} stands for one of the possible arguments described
2000 above (or no argument) specifying where to break. @xref{Conditions,
2001 ,Break conditions}, for more information on breakpoint conditions.
2002
2003 @item tbreak @var{args}
2004 @kindex tbreak
2005 Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args} are the
2006 same as for the @code{break} command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
2007 way, but the breakpoint is automatically disabled after the first time your
2008 program stops there. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
2009
2010 @item rbreak @var{regex}
2011 @kindex rbreak
2012 @cindex regular expression
2013 @c FIXME what kind of regexp?
2014 Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
2015 @var{regex}. This command
2016 sets an unconditional breakpoint on all matches, printing a list of all
2017 breakpoints it set. Once these breakpoints are set, they are treated
2018 just like the breakpoints set with the @code{break} command. They can
2019 be deleted, disabled, made conditional, etc., in the standard ways.
2020
2021 @ifclear CONLY
2022 When debugging C++ programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
2023 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
2024 classes.
2025 @end ifclear
2026
2027 @kindex info breakpoints
2028 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info breakpoints}
2029 @item info breakpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2030 @itemx info break @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2031 @itemx info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2032 Print a table of all breakpoints and watchpoints set and not
2033 deleted, with the following columns for each breakpoint:
2034
2035 @table @emph
2036 @item Breakpoint Numbers
2037 @item Type
2038 Breakpoint or watchpoint.
2039 @item Disposition
2040 Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted when hit.
2041 @item Enabled or Disabled
2042 Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}. @samp{n} marks breakpoints
2043 that are not enabled.
2044 @item Address
2045 Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address
2046 @item What
2047 Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
2048 line number.
2049 @end table
2050
2051 @noindent
2052 If a breakpoint is conditional, @code{info break} shows the condition on
2053 the line following the affected breakpoint; breakpoint commands, if any,
2054 are listed after that.
2055
2056 @noindent
2057 @code{info break} with a breakpoint
2058 number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint. The
2059 convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
2060 the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
2061 listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).
2062 @end table
2063
2064 @value{GDBN} allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
2065 your program. There is nothing silly or meaningless about this. When
2066 the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful
2067 (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2068
2069 @cindex negative breakpoint numbers
2070 @cindex internal @value{GDBN} breakpoints
2071 @value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for special
2072 purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C programs).
2073 These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers, starting with
2074 @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
2075
2076 You can see these breakpoints with the @value{GDBN} maintenance command
2077 @samp{maint info breakpoints}.
2078
2079 @table @code
2080 @kindex maint info breakpoints
2081 @item maint info breakpoints
2082 Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
2083 breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
2084 internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
2085 breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
2086 is shown:
2087
2088 @table @code
2089 @item breakpoint
2090 Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
2091
2092 @item watchpoint
2093 Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
2094
2095 @item longjmp
2096 Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
2097 @code{longjmp} calls.
2098
2099 @item longjmp resume
2100 Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
2101
2102 @item until
2103 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
2104
2105 @item finish
2106 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
2107 @end table
2108
2109 @end table
2110
2111
2112 @node Set Watchpoints
2113 @subsection Setting watchpoints
2114 @cindex setting watchpoints
2115
2116 You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
2117 expression changes, without having to predict a particular place
2118 where this may happen.
2119
2120 Watchpoints currently execute two orders of magnitude more slowly than
2121 other breakpoints, but this can be well worth it to catch errors where
2122 you have no clue what part of your program is the culprit. Some
2123 processors provide special hardware to support watchpoint evaluation; future
2124 releases of @value{GDBN} will use such hardware if it is available.
2125
2126 @table @code
2127 @kindex watch
2128 @item watch @var{expr}
2129 Set a watchpoint for an expression.
2130
2131 @kindex info watchpoints
2132 @item info watchpoints
2133 This command prints a list of watchpoints and breakpoints; it is the
2134 same as @code{info break}.
2135 @end table
2136
2137 @ifclear CONLY
2138 @node Exception Handling
2139 @subsection Breakpoints and exceptions
2140 @cindex exception handlers
2141
2142 Some languages, such as GNU C++, implement exception handling. You can
2143 use @value{GDBN} to examine what caused your program to raise an exception,
2144 and to list the exceptions your program is prepared to handle at a
2145 given point in time.
2146
2147 @table @code
2148 @item catch @var{exceptions}
2149 @kindex catch
2150 You can set breakpoints at active exception handlers by using the
2151 @code{catch} command. @var{exceptions} is a list of names of exceptions
2152 to catch.
2153 @end table
2154
2155 You can use @code{info catch} to list active exception handlers.
2156 @xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}.
2157
2158 There are currently some limitations to exception handling in @value{GDBN}.
2159 These will be corrected in a future release.
2160
2161 @itemize @bullet
2162 @item
2163 If you call a function interactively, @value{GDBN} normally returns
2164 control to you when the function has finished executing. If the call
2165 raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism that
2166 returns control to you and cause your program to simply continue
2167 running until it hits a breakpoint, catches a signal that @value{GDBN} is
2168 listening for, or exits.
2169 @item
2170 You cannot raise an exception interactively.
2171 @item
2172 You cannot interactively install an exception handler.
2173 @end itemize
2174
2175 @cindex raise exceptions
2176 Sometimes @code{catch} is not the best way to debug exception handling:
2177 if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better to
2178 stop @emph{before} the exception handler is called, since that way you
2179 can see the stack before any unwinding takes place. If you set a
2180 breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
2181 out where the exception was raised.
2182
2183 To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
2184 knowledge of the implementation. In the case of GNU C++, exceptions are
2185 raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
2186 which has the following ANSI C interface:
2187
2188 @example
2189 /* @var{addr} is where the exception identifier is stored.
2190 ID is the exception identifier. */
2191 void __raise_exception (void **@var{addr}, void *@var{id});
2192 @end example
2193
2194 @noindent
2195 To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack
2196 unwinding takes place, set a breakpoint on @code{__raise_exception}
2197 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions}).
2198
2199 With a conditional breakpoint (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions})
2200 that depends on the value of @var{id}, you can stop your program when
2201 a specific exception is raised. You can use multiple conditional
2202 breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
2203 raised.
2204 @end ifclear
2205
2206 @node Delete Breaks
2207 @subsection Deleting breakpoints
2208
2209 @cindex clearing breakpoints, watchpoints
2210 @cindex deleting breakpoints, watchpoints
2211 It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint or watchpoint once it
2212 has done its job and you no longer want your program to stop there. This
2213 is called @dfn{deleting} the breakpoint. A breakpoint that has been
2214 deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.
2215
2216 With the @code{clear} command you can delete breakpoints according to
2217 where they are in your program. With the @code{delete} command you can
2218 delete individual breakpoints or watchpoints by specifying their
2219 breakpoint numbers.
2220
2221 It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it. @value{GDBN}
2222 automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be executed
2223 when you continue execution without changing the execution address.
2224
2225 @table @code
2226 @item clear
2227 @kindex clear
2228 Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in the
2229 selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). When
2230 the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete a
2231 breakpoint where your program just stopped.
2232
2233 @item clear @var{function}
2234 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{function}
2235 Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the function @var{function}.
2236
2237 @item clear @var{linenum}
2238 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2239 Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified line.
2240
2241 @item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2242 @cindex delete breakpoints
2243 @kindex delete
2244 @kindex d
2245 Delete the breakpoints or watchpoints of the numbers specified as
2246 arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all breakpoints (@value{GDBN}
2247 asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set confirm off}). You
2248 can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
2249 @end table
2250
2251 @node Disabling
2252 @subsection Disabling breakpoints
2253
2254 @cindex disabled breakpoints
2255 @cindex enabled breakpoints
2256 Rather than deleting a breakpoint or watchpoint, you might prefer to
2257 @dfn{disable} it. This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if it had
2258 been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so that
2259 you can @dfn{enable} it again later.
2260
2261 You disable and enable breakpoints and watchpoints with the
2262 @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands, optionally specifying one or
2263 more breakpoint numbers as arguments. Use @code{info break} or
2264 @code{info watch} to print a list of breakpoints or watchpoints if you
2265 do not know which numbers to use.
2266
2267 A breakpoint or watchpoint can have any of four different states of
2268 enablement:
2269
2270 @itemize @bullet
2271 @item
2272 Enabled. The breakpoint will stop your program. A breakpoint set
2273 with the @code{break} command starts out in this state.
2274 @item
2275 Disabled. The breakpoint has no effect on your program.
2276 @item
2277 Enabled once. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2278 when it does so it will become disabled. A breakpoint set
2279 with the @code{tbreak} command starts out in this state.
2280 @item
2281 Enabled for deletion. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2282 immediately after it does so it will be deleted permanently.
2283 @end itemize
2284
2285 You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints and
2286 watchpoints:
2287
2288 @table @code
2289 @item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2290 @kindex disable breakpoints
2291 @kindex disable
2292 @kindex dis
2293 Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
2294 listed. A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten. All
2295 options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
2296 case the breakpoint is enabled again later. You may abbreviate
2297 @code{disable} as @code{dis}.
2298
2299 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2300 @kindex enable breakpoints
2301 @kindex enable
2302 Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints). They
2303 become effective once again in stopping your program.
2304
2305 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{bnums}@dots{}
2306 Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily. Each will be disabled
2307 again the next time it stops your program.
2308
2309 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{bnums}@dots{}
2310 Enable the specified breakpoints to work once and then die. Each of
2311 the breakpoints will be deleted the next time it stops your program.
2312 @end table
2313
2314 Save for a breakpoint set with @code{tbreak} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2315 ,Setting breakpoints}), breakpoints that you set are initially enabled;
2316 subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you use one of
2317 the commands above. (The command @code{until} can set and delete a
2318 breakpoint of its own, but it will not change the state of your other
2319 breakpoints; see @ref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and
2320 stepping}.)
2321
2322 @node Conditions
2323 @subsection Break conditions
2324 @cindex conditional breakpoints
2325 @cindex breakpoint conditions
2326
2327 @c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr? Context where wanted?
2328 @c in particular for a watchpoint?
2329 The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
2330 specified place. You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
2331 breakpoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
2332 programming language (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). A breakpoint with
2333 a condition evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it,
2334 and your program stops only if the condition is @emph{true}.
2335
2336 This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in that
2337 situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated---that is,
2338 when the condition is false. In C, if you want to test an assertion expressed
2339 by the condition @var{assert}, you should set the condition
2340 @samp{! @var{assert}} on the appropriate breakpoint.
2341
2342 Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
2343 since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow---but
2344 it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
2345 and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an interesting
2346 one.
2347
2348 Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions in
2349 your program. This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
2350 that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to
2351 format special data structures. The effects are completely predictable
2352 unless there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address. (In
2353 that case, @value{GDBN} might see the other breakpoint first and stop your
2354 program without checking the condition of this one.) Note that
2355 breakpoint commands are usually more convenient and flexible for the
2356 purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
2357 (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint command lists}).
2358
2359 Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
2360 @samp{if} in the arguments to the @code{break} command. @xref{Set
2361 Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}. They can also be changed at any time
2362 with the @code{condition} command. The @code{watch} command does not
2363 recognize the @code{if} keyword; @code{condition} is the only way to
2364 impose a further condition on a watchpoint.
2365
2366 @table @code
2367 @item condition @var{bnum} @var{expression}
2368 @kindex condition
2369 Specify @var{expression} as the break condition for breakpoint or
2370 watchpoint number @var{bnum}. From now on, this breakpoint will stop
2371 your program only if the value of @var{expression} is true (nonzero, in
2372 C). When you use @code{condition}, @value{GDBN} checks @var{expression}
2373 immediately for syntactic correctness, and to determine whether symbols
2374 in it have referents in the context of your breakpoint.
2375 @c FIXME so what does GDB do if there is no referent? Moreover, what
2376 @c about watchpoints?
2377 @value{GDBN} does
2378 not actually evaluate @var{expression} at the time the @code{condition}
2379 command is given, however. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
2380
2381 @item condition @var{bnum}
2382 Remove the condition from breakpoint number @var{bnum}. It becomes
2383 an ordinary unconditional breakpoint.
2384 @end table
2385
2386 @cindex ignore count (of breakpoint)
2387 A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
2388 breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times. This is so
2389 useful that there is a special way to do it, using the @dfn{ignore
2390 count} of the breakpoint. Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which
2391 is an integer. Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and
2392 therefore has no effect. But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose
2393 ignore count is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements
2394 the ignore count by one and continues. As a result, if the ignore count
2395 value is @var{n}, the breakpoint will not stop the next @var{n} times it
2396 is reached.
2397
2398 @table @code
2399 @item ignore @var{bnum} @var{count}
2400 @kindex ignore
2401 Set the ignore count of breakpoint number @var{bnum} to @var{count}.
2402 The next @var{count} times the breakpoint is reached, your program's
2403 execution will not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, @value{GDBN}
2404 takes no action.
2405
2406 To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify
2407 a count of zero.
2408
2409 When you use @code{continue} to resume execution of your program from a
2410 breakpoint, you can specify an ignore count directly as an argument to
2411 @code{continue}, rather than using @code{ignore}. @xref{Continuing and
2412 Stepping,,Continuing and stepping}.
2413
2414 If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the condition
2415 is not checked. Once the ignore count reaches zero, the condition will
2416 be checked.
2417
2418 You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition such
2419 as @w{@samp{$foo-- <= 0}} using a debugger convenience variable that
2420 is decremented each time. @xref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
2421 variables}.
2422 @end table
2423
2424 @node Break Commands
2425 @subsection Breakpoint command lists
2426
2427 @cindex breakpoint commands
2428 You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint) a series of commands to
2429 execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint. For example, you
2430 might want to print the values of certain expressions, or enable other
2431 breakpoints.
2432
2433 @table @code
2434 @item commands @r{[}@var{bnum}@r{]}
2435 @itemx @dots{} @var{command-list} @dots{}
2436 @itemx end
2437 @kindex commands
2438 @kindex end
2439 Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number @var{bnum}. The commands
2440 themselves appear on the following lines. Type a line containing just
2441 @code{end} to terminate the commands.
2442
2443 To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type @code{commands} and
2444 follow it immediately with @code{end}; that is, give no commands.
2445
2446 With no @var{bnum} argument, @code{commands} refers to the last
2447 breakpoint or watchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most recently
2448 encountered).
2449 @end table
2450
2451 Pressing @key{RET} as a means of repeating the last @value{GDBN} command is
2452 disabled within a @var{command-list}.
2453
2454 You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again. Simply
2455 use the @code{continue} command, or @code{step}, or any other command
2456 that resumes execution.
2457
2458 Any other commands in the command list, after a command that resumes
2459 execution, are ignored. This is because any time you resume execution
2460 (even with a simple @code{next} or @code{step}), you may encounter
2461 another breakpoint---which could have its own command list, leading to
2462 ambiguities about which list to execute.
2463
2464 @kindex silent
2465 If the first command you specify in a command list is @code{silent}, the
2466 usual message about stopping at a breakpoint is not printed. This may
2467 be desirable for breakpoints that are to print a specific message and
2468 then continue. If none of the remaining commands print anything, you
2469 will see no sign that the breakpoint was reached. @code{silent} is
2470 meaningful only at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.
2471
2472 The commands @code{echo}, @code{output}, and @code{printf} allow you to
2473 print precisely controlled output, and are often useful in silent
2474 breakpoints. @xref{Output, ,Commands for controlled output}.
2475
2476 For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print the
2477 value of @code{x} at entry to @code{foo} whenever @code{x} is positive.
2478
2479 @example
2480 break foo if x>0
2481 commands
2482 silent
2483 printf "x is %d\n",x
2484 cont
2485 end
2486 @end example
2487
2488 One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug so
2489 you can test for another. Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous line
2490 of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
2491 erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
2492 to any variables that need them. End with the @code{continue} command
2493 so that your program does not stop, and start with the @code{silent}
2494 command so that no output is produced. Here is an example:
2495
2496 @example
2497 break 403
2498 commands
2499 silent
2500 set x = y + 4
2501 cont
2502 end
2503 @end example
2504
2505 @ifclear CONLY
2506 @node Breakpoint Menus
2507 @subsection Breakpoint menus
2508 @cindex overloading
2509 @cindex symbol overloading
2510
2511 Some programming languages (notably C++) permit a single function name
2512 to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
2513 This is called @dfn{overloading}. When a function name is overloaded,
2514 @samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell @value{GDBN} where you want
2515 a breakpoint. If you realize this will be a problem, you can use
2516 something like @samp{break @var{function}(@var{types})} to specify which
2517 particular version of the function you want. Otherwise, @value{GDBN} offers
2518 you a menu of numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and
2519 waits for your selection with the prompt @samp{>}. The first two
2520 options are always @samp{[0] cancel} and @samp{[1] all}. Typing @kbd{1}
2521 sets a breakpoint at each definition of @var{function}, and typing
2522 @kbd{0} aborts the @code{break} command without setting any new
2523 breakpoints.
2524
2525 For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
2526 breakpoint at the overloaded symbol @code{String::after}.
2527 We choose three particular definitions of that function name:
2528
2529 @c FIXME! This is likely to change to show arg type lists, at least
2530 @smallexample
2531 (@value{GDBP}) b String::after
2532 [0] cancel
2533 [1] all
2534 [2] file:String.cc; line number:867
2535 [3] file:String.cc; line number:860
2536 [4] file:String.cc; line number:875
2537 [5] file:String.cc; line number:853
2538 [6] file:String.cc; line number:846
2539 [7] file:String.cc; line number:735
2540 > 2 4 6
2541 Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
2542 Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
2543 Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
2544 Multiple breakpoints were set.
2545 Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted
2546 breakpoints.
2547 (@value{GDBP})
2548 @end smallexample
2549 @end ifclear
2550
2551 @ifclear BARETARGET
2552 @node Error in Breakpoints
2553 @subsection ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2554
2555 @c FIXME: "cannot insert breakpoints" error, v unclear.
2556 @c Q in pending mail to Gilmore. ---pesch@cygnus.com, 26mar91
2557 @c some light may be shed by looking at instances of
2558 @c ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT. But error message seems possible otherwise
2559 @c too. pesch, 20sep91
2560 Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
2561 any other process is running that program. In this situation,
2562 attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes @value{GDBN}
2563 to stop the other process.
2564
2565 When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:
2566
2567 @enumerate
2568 @item
2569 Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
2570
2571 @item
2572 Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new name.
2573 Resume @value{GDBN} and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify that @value{GDBN}
2574 should run your program under that name. Then start your program again.
2575
2576 @c FIXME: RMS commented here "Show example". Maybe when someone
2577 @c explains the first FIXME: in this section...
2578
2579 @item
2580 Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using the
2581 linker option @samp{-N}. The operating system limitation may not apply
2582 to nonsharable executables.
2583 @end enumerate
2584 @end ifclear
2585
2586 @node Continuing and Stepping
2587 @section Continuing and stepping
2588
2589 @cindex stepping
2590 @cindex continuing
2591 @cindex resuming execution
2592 @dfn{Continuing} means resuming program execution until your program
2593 completes normally. In contrast, @dfn{stepping} means executing just
2594 one more ``step'' of your program, where ``step'' may mean either one
2595 line of source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what
2596 particular command you use). Either when continuing
2597 or when stepping, your program may stop even sooner, due to
2598 @ifset BARETARGET
2599 a breakpoint.
2600 @end ifset
2601 @ifclear BARETARGET
2602 a breakpoint or a signal. (If due to a signal, you may want to use
2603 @code{handle}, or use @samp{signal 0} to resume execution.
2604 @xref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
2605 @end ifclear
2606
2607 @table @code
2608 @item continue @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2609 @itemx c @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2610 @itemx fg @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2611 @kindex continue
2612 @kindex c
2613 @kindex fg
2614 Resume program execution, at the address where your program last stopped;
2615 any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed. The optional argument
2616 @var{ignore-count} allows you to specify a further number of times to
2617 ignore a breakpoint at this location; its effect is like that of
2618 @code{ignore} (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2619
2620 The argument @var{ignore-count} is meaningful only when your program
2621 stopped due to a breakpoint. At other times, the argument to
2622 @code{continue} is ignored.
2623
2624 The synonyms @code{c} and @code{fg} are provided purely for convenience,
2625 and have exactly the same behavior as @code{continue}.
2626 @end table
2627
2628 To resume execution at a different place, you can use @code{return}
2629 (@pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}) to go back to the
2630 calling function; or @code{jump} (@pxref{Jumping, ,Continuing at a
2631 different address}) to go to an arbitrary location in your program.
2632
2633 A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint
2634 @ifclear CONLY
2635 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions})
2636 @end ifclear
2637 @ifset CONLY
2638 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints and watchpoints})
2639 @end ifset
2640 at the
2641 beginning of the function or the section of your program where a
2642 problem is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that
2643 breakpoint, and then step through the suspect area, examining the
2644 variables that are interesting, until you see the problem happen.
2645
2646 @table @code
2647 @item step
2648 @kindex step
2649 @kindex s
2650 Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
2651 line, then stop it and return control to @value{GDBN}. This command is
2652 abbreviated @code{s}.
2653
2654 @quotation
2655 @emph{Warning:} If you use the @code{step} command while control is
2656 within a function that was compiled without debugging information,
2657 execution proceeds until control reaches a function that does have
2658 debugging information.
2659 @end quotation
2660
2661 @item step @var{count}
2662 Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times. If a
2663 breakpoint is reached,
2664 @ifclear BARETARGET
2665 or a signal not related to stepping occurs before @var{count} steps,
2666 @end ifclear
2667 stepping stops right away.
2668
2669 @item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2670 @kindex next
2671 @kindex n
2672 Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
2673 Similar to @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the line
2674 of code are executed without stopping. Execution stops when control
2675 reaches a different line of code at the stack level which was executing
2676 when the @code{next} command was given. This command is abbreviated
2677 @code{n}.
2678
2679 An argument @var{count} is a repeat count, as for @code{step}.
2680
2681 @code{next} within a function that lacks debugging information acts like
2682 @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the code of the
2683 function are executed without stopping.
2684
2685 @item finish
2686 @kindex finish
2687 Continue running until just after function in the selected stack frame
2688 returns. Print the returned value (if any).
2689
2690 Contrast this with the @code{return} command (@pxref{Returning,
2691 ,Returning from a function}).
2692
2693 @item until
2694 @kindex until
2695 @itemx u
2696 @kindex u
2697 Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
2698 current stack frame, is reached. This command is used to avoid single
2699 stepping through a loop more than once. It is like the @code{next}
2700 command, except that when @code{until} encounters a jump, it
2701 automatically continues execution until the program counter is greater
2702 than the address of the jump.
2703
2704 This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single stepping
2705 though it, @code{until} will cause your program to continue execution
2706 until the loop is exited. In contrast, a @code{next} command at the end
2707 of a loop will simply step back to the beginning of the loop, which
2708 would force you to step through the next iteration.
2709
2710 @code{until} always stops your program if it attempts to exit the current
2711 stack frame.
2712
2713 @code{until} may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
2714 of machine code does not match the order of the source lines. For
2715 example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the @code{f}
2716 (@code{frame}) command shows that execution is stopped at line
2717 @code{206}; yet when we use @code{until}, we get to line @code{195}:
2718
2719 @example
2720 (@value{GDBP}) f
2721 #0 main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
2722 206 expand_input();
2723 (@value{GDBP}) until
2724 195 for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) @{
2725 @end example
2726
2727 This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
2728 generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than the
2729 start, of the loop---even though the test in a C @code{for}-loop is
2730 written before the body of the loop. The @code{until} command appeared
2731 to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
2732 expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
2733 statement---not in terms of the actual machine code.
2734
2735 @code{until} with no argument works by means of single
2736 instruction stepping, and hence is slower than @code{until} with an
2737 argument.
2738
2739 @item until @var{location}
2740 @itemx u @var{location}
2741 Continue running your program until either the specified location is
2742 reached, or the current stack frame returns. @var{location} is any of
2743 the forms of argument acceptable to @code{break} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2744 ,Setting breakpoints}). This form of the command uses breakpoints,
2745 and hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument.
2746
2747 @item stepi
2748 @itemx si
2749 @kindex stepi
2750 @kindex si
2751 Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
2752
2753 It is often useful to do @samp{display/i $pc} when stepping by machine
2754 instructions. This will cause the next instruction to be executed to
2755 be displayed automatically at each stop. @xref{Auto Display,
2756 ,Automatic display}.
2757
2758 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{step}.
2759
2760 @need 750
2761 @item nexti
2762 @itemx ni
2763 @kindex nexti
2764 @kindex ni
2765 Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
2766 proceed until the function returns.
2767
2768 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{next}.
2769 @end table
2770
2771 @ifset POSIX
2772 @node Signals
2773 @section Signals
2774 @cindex signals
2775
2776 A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program. The
2777 operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
2778 kind a name and a number. For example, in Unix @code{SIGINT} is the
2779 signal a program gets when you type an interrupt (often @kbd{C-c});
2780 @code{SIGSEGV} is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
2781 memory far away from all the areas in use; @code{SIGALRM} occurs when
2782 the alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
2783 requested an alarm).
2784
2785 @cindex fatal signals
2786 Some signals, including @code{SIGALRM}, are a normal part of the
2787 functioning of your program. Others, such as @code{SIGSEGV}, indicate
2788 errors; these signals are @dfn{fatal} (kill your program immediately) if the
2789 program has not specified in advance some other way to handle the signal.
2790 @code{SIGINT} does not indicate an error in your program, but it is normally
2791 fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt: to kill the program.
2792
2793 @value{GDBN} has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
2794 program. You can tell @value{GDBN} in advance what to do for each kind of
2795 signal.
2796
2797 @cindex handling signals
2798 Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to ignore non-erroneous signals like @code{SIGALRM}
2799 (so as not to interfere with their role in the functioning of your program)
2800 but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
2801 You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
2802
2803 @table @code
2804 @item info signals
2805 @kindex info signals
2806 Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how @value{GDBN} has been told to
2807 handle each one. You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
2808 the defined types of signals.
2809
2810 @item handle @var{signal} @var{keywords}@dots{}
2811 @kindex handle
2812 Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the
2813 number of a signal or its name (with or without the @samp{SIG} at the
2814 beginning). The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
2815 @end table
2816
2817 @c @group
2818 The keywords allowed by the @code{handle} command can be abbreviated.
2819 Their full names are:
2820
2821 @table @code
2822 @item nostop
2823 @value{GDBN} should not stop your program when this signal happens. It may
2824 still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.
2825
2826 @item stop
2827 @value{GDBN} should stop your program when this signal happens. This implies
2828 the @code{print} keyword as well.
2829
2830 @item print
2831 @value{GDBN} should print a message when this signal happens.
2832
2833 @item noprint
2834 @value{GDBN} should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all. This
2835 implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
2836
2837 @item pass
2838 @value{GDBN} should allow your program to see this signal; your program will be
2839 able to handle the signal, or may be terminated if the signal is fatal
2840 and not handled.
2841
2842 @item nopass
2843 @value{GDBN} should not allow your program to see this signal.
2844 @end table
2845 @c @end group
2846
2847 When a signal stops your program, the signal is not visible until you
2848 continue. Your program will see the signal then, if @code{pass} is in
2849 effect for the signal in question @emph{at that time}. In other words,
2850 after @value{GDBN} reports a signal, you can use the @code{handle}
2851 command with @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether that
2852 signal will be seen by your program when you later continue it.
2853
2854 You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
2855 seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
2856 or to give it any signal at any time. For example, if your program stopped
2857 due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store correct
2858 values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see more
2859 execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
2860 a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal. To prevent this,
2861 you can continue with @samp{signal 0}. @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
2862 program a signal}.
2863 @end ifset
2864
2865 @node Stack
2866 @chapter Examining the Stack
2867
2868 When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is where it
2869 stopped and how it got there.
2870
2871 @cindex call stack
2872 Each time your program performs a function call, the information about
2873 where in your program the call was made from is saved in a block of data
2874 called a @dfn{stack frame}. The frame also contains the arguments of the
2875 call and the local variables of the function that was called. All the
2876 stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
2877 stack}.
2878
2879 When your program stops, the @value{GDBN} commands for examining the
2880 stack allow you to see all of this information.
2881
2882 @cindex selected frame
2883 One of the stack frames is @dfn{selected} by @value{GDBN} and many
2884 @value{GDBN} commands refer implicitly to the selected frame. In
2885 particular, whenever you ask @value{GDBN} for the value of a variable in
2886 your program, the value is found in the selected frame. There are
2887 special @value{GDBN} commands to select whichever frame you are
2888 interested in.
2889
2890 When your program stops, @value{GDBN} automatically selects the
2891 currently executing frame and describes it briefly as the @code{frame}
2892 command does (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}).
2893
2894 @menu
2895 * Frames:: Stack frames
2896 * Backtrace:: Backtraces
2897 * Selection:: Selecting a frame
2898 * Frame Info:: Information on a frame
2899 @ifset MIPS
2900 * MIPS Stack:: MIPS machines and the function stack
2901 @end ifset
2902 @end menu
2903
2904 @node Frames
2905 @section Stack frames
2906
2907 @cindex frame
2908 @cindex stack frame
2909 The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called @dfn{stack
2910 frames}, or @dfn{frames} for short; each frame is the data associated
2911 with one call to one function. The frame contains the arguments given
2912 to the function, the function's local variables, and the address at
2913 which the function is executing.
2914
2915 @cindex initial frame
2916 @cindex outermost frame
2917 @cindex innermost frame
2918 When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of the
2919 function @code{main}. This is called the @dfn{initial} frame or the
2920 @dfn{outermost} frame. Each time a function is called, a new frame is
2921 made. Each time a function returns, the frame for that function invocation
2922 is eliminated. If a function is recursive, there can be many frames for
2923 the same function. The frame for the function in which execution is
2924 actually occurring is called the @dfn{innermost} frame. This is the most
2925 recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.
2926
2927 @cindex frame pointer
2928 Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses. A
2929 stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own address; each
2930 kind of computer has a convention for choosing one of those bytes whose
2931 address serves as the address of the frame. Usually this address is kept
2932 in a register called the @dfn{frame pointer register} while execution is
2933 going on in that frame.
2934
2935 @cindex frame number
2936 @value{GDBN} assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with
2937 zero for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it,
2938 and so on upward. These numbers do not really exist in your program;
2939 they are assigned by @value{GDBN} to give you a way of designating stack
2940 frames in @value{GDBN} commands.
2941
2942 @c below produces an acceptable overful hbox. --mew 13aug1993
2943 @cindex frameless execution
2944 Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they operate
2945 without stack frames. (For example, the @code{@value{GCC}} option
2946 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} will generate functions without a frame.)
2947 This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
2948 the frame setup time. @value{GDBN} has limited facilities for dealing
2949 with these function invocations. If the innermost function invocation
2950 has no stack frame, @value{GDBN} will nevertheless regard it as though
2951 it had a separate frame, which is numbered zero as usual, allowing
2952 correct tracing of the function call chain. However, @value{GDBN} has
2953 no provision for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.
2954
2955 @node Backtrace
2956 @section Backtraces
2957
2958 A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is. It shows one
2959 line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently executing
2960 frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and on up the
2961 stack.
2962
2963 @table @code
2964 @item backtrace
2965 @itemx bt
2966 @kindex backtrace
2967 @kindex bt
2968 Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
2969 frames in the stack.
2970
2971 You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system interrupt
2972 character, normally @kbd{C-c}.
2973
2974 @item backtrace @var{n}
2975 @itemx bt @var{n}
2976 Similar, but print only the innermost @var{n} frames.
2977
2978 @item backtrace -@var{n}
2979 @itemx bt -@var{n}
2980 Similar, but print only the outermost @var{n} frames.
2981 @end table
2982
2983 @kindex where
2984 @kindex info stack
2985 @kindex info s
2986 The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
2987 are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
2988
2989 Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function name.
2990 The program counter value is also shown---unless you use @code{set
2991 print address off}. The backtrace also shows the source file name and
2992 line number, as well as the arguments to the function. The program
2993 counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
2994 line number.
2995
2996 Here is an example of a backtrace. It was made with the command
2997 @samp{bt 3}, so it shows the innermost three frames.
2998
2999 @smallexample
3000 @group
3001 #0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
3002 at builtin.c:993
3003 #1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
3004 #2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
3005 at macro.c:71
3006 (More stack frames follow...)
3007 @end group
3008 @end smallexample
3009
3010 @noindent
3011 The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter
3012 value, indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the
3013 code for line @code{993} of @code{builtin.c}.
3014
3015 @node Selection
3016 @section Selecting a frame
3017
3018 Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program work on
3019 whichever stack frame is selected at the moment. Here are the commands for
3020 selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a brief description
3021 of the stack frame just selected.
3022
3023 @table @code
3024 @item frame @var{n}
3025 @itemx f @var{n}
3026 @kindex frame
3027 @kindex f
3028 Select frame number @var{n}. Recall that frame zero is the innermost
3029 (currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
3030 innermost one, and so on. The highest-numbered frame is the one for
3031 @code{main}.
3032
3033 @item frame @var{addr}
3034 @itemx f @var{addr}
3035 Select the frame at address @var{addr}. This is useful mainly if the
3036 chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
3037 impossible for @value{GDBN} to assign numbers properly to all frames. In
3038 addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks and
3039 switches between them.
3040
3041 @ifset SPARC
3042 On the SPARC architecture, @code{frame} needs two addresses to
3043 select an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.
3044 @c note to future updaters: this is conditioned on a flag
3045 @c FRAME_SPECIFICATION_DYADIC in the tm-*.h files, currently only used
3046 @c by SPARC, hence the specific attribution. Generalize or list all
3047 @c possibilities if more supported machines start doing this.
3048 @end ifset
3049
3050 @item up @var{n}
3051 @kindex up
3052 Move @var{n} frames up the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3053 advances toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
3054 that have existed longer. @var{n} defaults to one.
3055
3056 @item down @var{n}
3057 @kindex down
3058 @kindex do
3059 Move @var{n} frames down the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3060 advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
3061 that were created more recently. @var{n} defaults to one. You may
3062 abbreviate @code{down} as @code{do}.
3063 @end table
3064
3065 All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
3066 frame. The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
3067 arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
3068 frame. The second line shows the text of that source line.
3069
3070 For example:
3071 @smallexample
3072 @group
3073 (@value{GDBP}) up
3074 #1 0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
3075 at env.c:10
3076 10 read_input_file (argv[i]);
3077 @end group
3078 @end smallexample
3079
3080 After such a printout, the @code{list} command with no arguments will
3081 print ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.
3082 @xref{List, ,Printing source lines}.
3083
3084 @table @code
3085 @item up-silently @var{n}
3086 @itemx down-silently @var{n}
3087 @kindex down-silently
3088 @kindex up-silently
3089 These two commands are variants of @code{up} and @code{down},
3090 respectively; they differ in that they do their work silently, without
3091 causing display of the new frame. They are intended primarily for use
3092 in @value{GDBN} command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
3093 distracting.
3094 @end table
3095
3096 @node Frame Info
3097 @section Information about a frame
3098
3099 There are several other commands to print information about the selected
3100 stack frame.
3101
3102 @table @code
3103 @item frame
3104 @itemx f
3105 When used without any argument, this command does not change which
3106 frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
3107 selected stack frame. It can be abbreviated @code{f}. With an
3108 argument, this command is used to select a stack frame.
3109 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3110
3111 @item info frame
3112 @itemx info f
3113 @kindex info frame
3114 @kindex info f
3115 This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
3116 including the address of the frame, the addresses of the next frame down
3117 (called by this frame) and the next frame up (caller of this frame), the
3118 language that the source code corresponding to this frame was written in,
3119 the address of the frame's arguments, the program counter saved in it
3120 (the address of execution in the caller frame), and which registers
3121 were saved in the frame. The verbose description is useful when
3122 something has gone wrong that has made the stack format fail to fit
3123 the usual conventions.
3124
3125 @item info frame @var{addr}
3126 @itemx info f @var{addr}
3127 Print a verbose description of the frame at address @var{addr},
3128 without selecting that frame. The selected frame remains unchanged by
3129 this command.
3130
3131 @item info args
3132 @kindex info args
3133 Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.
3134
3135 @item info locals
3136 @kindex info locals
3137 Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
3138 line. These are all variables (declared either static or automatic)
3139 accessible at the point of execution of the selected frame.
3140
3141 @ifclear CONLY
3142 @item info catch
3143 @kindex info catch
3144 @cindex catch exceptions
3145 @cindex exception handlers
3146 Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
3147 current stack frame at the current point of execution. To see other
3148 exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the @code{up},
3149 @code{down}, or @code{frame} commands); then type @code{info catch}.
3150 @xref{Exception Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
3151 @end ifclear
3152 @end table
3153
3154 @ifset MIPS
3155 @node MIPS Stack
3156 @section MIPS machines and the function stack
3157
3158 @cindex stack on MIPS
3159 @cindex MIPS stack
3160 MIPS based computers use an unusual stack frame, which sometimes
3161 requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to find the
3162 beginning of a function.
3163
3164 @cindex response time, MIPS debugging
3165 To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
3166 @value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
3167 you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
3168 commands:
3169 @c FIXME! So what happens when GDB does *not* find the beginning of a
3170 @c function?
3171
3172 @cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (MIPS)
3173 @table @code
3174 @item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
3175 Restrict @var{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its search
3176 for the beginning of a function. A value of @code{0} (the default)
3177 means there is no limit.
3178
3179 @item show heuristic-fence-post
3180 Display the current limit.
3181 @end table
3182
3183 @noindent
3184 These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
3185 for debugging programs on MIPS processors.
3186 @end ifset
3187
3188 @node Source
3189 @chapter Examining Source Files
3190
3191 @value{GDBN} can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
3192 information recorded in the program tells @value{GDBN} what source files were
3193 used to build it. When your program stops, @value{GDBN} spontaneously prints
3194 the line where it stopped. Likewise, when you select a stack frame
3195 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}), @value{GDBN} prints the line where
3196 execution in that frame has stopped. You can print other portions of
3197 source files by explicit command.
3198
3199 @ifclear DOSHOST
3200 If you use @value{GDBN} through its GNU Emacs interface, you may prefer to use
3201 Emacs facilities to view source; @pxref{Emacs, ,Using @value{GDBN} under GNU
3202 Emacs}.
3203 @end ifclear
3204
3205 @menu
3206 * List:: Printing source lines
3207 @ifclear DOSHOST
3208 * Search:: Searching source files
3209 @end ifclear
3210
3211 * Source Path:: Specifying source directories
3212 * Machine Code:: Source and machine code
3213 @end menu
3214
3215 @node List
3216 @section Printing source lines
3217
3218 @kindex list
3219 @kindex l
3220 To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
3221 (abbreviated @code{l}). There are several ways to specify what part
3222 of the file you want to print.
3223
3224 Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
3225
3226 @table @code
3227 @item list @var{linenum}
3228 Print lines centered around line number @var{linenum} in the
3229 current source file.
3230
3231 @item list @var{function}
3232 Print lines centered around the beginning of function
3233 @var{function}.
3234
3235 @item list
3236 Print more lines. If the last lines printed were printed with a
3237 @code{list} command, this prints lines following the last lines
3238 printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line printed
3239 as part of displaying a stack frame (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the
3240 Stack}), this prints lines centered around that line.
3241
3242 @item list -
3243 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3244 @end table
3245
3246 By default, @value{GDBN} prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
3247 the @code{list} command. You can change this using @code{set listsize}:
3248
3249 @table @code
3250 @item set listsize @var{count}
3251 @kindex set listsize
3252 Make the @code{list} command display @var{count} source lines (unless
3253 the @code{list} argument explicitly specifies some other number).
3254
3255 @item show listsize
3256 @kindex show listsize
3257 Display the number of lines that @code{list} will currently display by
3258 default.
3259 @end table
3260
3261 Repeating a @code{list} command with @key{RET} discards the argument,
3262 so it is equivalent to typing just @code{list}. This is more useful
3263 than listing the same lines again. An exception is made for an
3264 argument of @samp{-}; that argument is preserved in repetition so that
3265 each repetition moves up in the source file.
3266
3267 @cindex linespec
3268 In general, the @code{list} command expects you to supply zero, one or two
3269 @dfn{linespecs}. Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways
3270 of writing them but the effect is always to specify some source line.
3271 Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for @code{list}:
3272
3273 @table @code
3274 @item list @var{linespec}
3275 Print lines centered around the line specified by @var{linespec}.
3276
3277 @item list @var{first},@var{last}
3278 Print lines from @var{first} to @var{last}. Both arguments are
3279 linespecs.
3280
3281 @item list ,@var{last}
3282 Print lines ending with @var{last}.
3283
3284 @item list @var{first},
3285 Print lines starting with @var{first}.
3286
3287 @item list +
3288 Print lines just after the lines last printed.
3289
3290 @item list -
3291 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3292
3293 @item list
3294 As described in the preceding table.
3295 @end table
3296
3297 Here are the ways of specifying a single source line---all the
3298 kinds of linespec.
3299
3300 @table @code
3301 @item @var{number}
3302 Specifies line @var{number} of the current source file.
3303 When a @code{list} command has two linespecs, this refers to
3304 the same source file as the first linespec.
3305
3306 @item +@var{offset}
3307 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines after the last line printed.
3308 When used as the second linespec in a @code{list} command that has
3309 two, this specifies the line @var{offset} lines down from the
3310 first linespec.
3311
3312 @item -@var{offset}
3313 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines before the last line printed.
3314
3315 @item @var{filename}:@var{number}
3316 Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
3317
3318 @item @var{function}
3319 @c FIXME: "of the open-brace" is C-centric. When we add other langs...
3320 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3321 function @var{function}.
3322
3323 @item @var{filename}:@var{function}
3324 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3325 function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}. You only need the
3326 file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
3327 identically named functions in different source files.
3328
3329 @item *@var{address}
3330 Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
3331 @var{address} may be any expression.
3332 @end table
3333
3334 @ifclear DOSHOST
3335 @node Search
3336 @section Searching source files
3337 @cindex searching
3338 @kindex reverse-search
3339
3340 There are two commands for searching through the current source file for a
3341 regular expression.
3342
3343 @table @code
3344 @item forward-search @var{regexp}
3345 @itemx search @var{regexp}
3346 @kindex search
3347 @kindex forward-search
3348 The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
3349 starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
3350 @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use
3351 synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
3352 @code{fo}.
3353
3354 @item reverse-search @var{regexp}
3355 The command @samp{reverse-search @var{regexp}} checks each line, starting
3356 with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a match
3357 for @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can abbreviate
3358 this command as @code{rev}.
3359 @end table
3360 @end ifclear
3361
3362 @node Source Path
3363 @section Specifying source directories
3364
3365 @cindex source path
3366 @cindex directories for source files
3367 Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the source
3368 files from which they were compiled, just the names. Even when they do,
3369 the directories could be moved between the compilation and your debugging
3370 session. @value{GDBN} has a list of directories to search for source files;
3371 this is called the @dfn{source path}. Each time @value{GDBN} wants a source file,
3372 it tries all the directories in the list, in the order they are present
3373 in the list, until it finds a file with the desired name. Note that
3374 the executable search path is @emph{not} used for this purpose. Neither is
3375 the current working directory, unless it happens to be in the source
3376 path.
3377
3378 If @value{GDBN} cannot find a source file in the source path, and the object
3379 program records a directory, @value{GDBN} tries that directory too. If the
3380 source path is empty, and there is no record of the compilation
3381 directory, @value{GDBN} will, as a last resort, look in the current
3382 directory.
3383
3384 Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, @value{GDBN} will clear out
3385 any information it has cached about where source files are found, where
3386 each line is in the file, etc.
3387
3388 @kindex directory
3389 When you start @value{GDBN}, its source path is empty.
3390 To add other directories, use the @code{directory} command.
3391
3392 @table @code
3393 @item directory @var{dirname} @dots{}
3394 Add directory @var{dirname} to the front of the source path. Several
3395 directory names may be given to this command, separated by @samp{:} or
3396 whitespace. You may specify a directory that is already in the source
3397 path; this moves it forward, so it will be searched sooner.
3398
3399 @kindex cdir
3400 @kindex cwd
3401 @kindex $cdir
3402 @kindex $cwd
3403 @cindex compilation directory
3404 @cindex current directory
3405 @cindex working directory
3406 @cindex directory, current
3407 @cindex directory, compilation
3408 You can use the string @samp{$cdir} to refer to the compilation
3409 directory (if one is recorded), and @samp{$cwd} to refer to the current
3410 working directory. @samp{$cwd} is not the same as @samp{.}---the former
3411 tracks the current working directory as it changes during your @value{GDBN}
3412 session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
3413 directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.
3414
3415 @item directory
3416 Reset the source path to empty again. This requires confirmation.
3417
3418 @c RET-repeat for @code{directory} is explicitly disabled, but since
3419 @c repeating it would be a no-op we do not say that. (thanks to RMS)
3420
3421 @item show directories
3422 @kindex show directories
3423 Print the source path: show which directories it contains.
3424 @end table
3425
3426 If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer of
3427 interest, @value{GDBN} may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
3428 versions of source. You can correct the situation as follows:
3429
3430 @enumerate
3431 @item
3432 Use @code{directory} with no argument to reset the source path to empty.
3433
3434 @item
3435 Use @code{directory} with suitable arguments to reinstall the
3436 directories you want in the source path. You can add all the
3437 directories in one command.
3438 @end enumerate
3439
3440 @node Machine Code
3441 @section Source and machine code
3442
3443 You can use the command @code{info line} to map source lines to program
3444 addresses (and vice versa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
3445 a range of addresses as machine instructions.
3446
3447 @table @code
3448 @item info line @var{linespec}
3449 @kindex info line
3450 Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
3451 source line @var{linespec}. You can specify source lines in any of
3452 the ways understood by the @code{list} command (@pxref{List, ,Printing
3453 source lines}).
3454 @end table
3455
3456 For example, we can use @code{info line} to discover the location of
3457 the object code for the first line of function
3458 @code{m4_changequote}:
3459
3460 @smallexample
3461 (@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changecom
3462 Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
3463 @end smallexample
3464
3465 @noindent
3466 We can also inquire (using @code{*@var{addr}} as the form for
3467 @var{linespec}) what source line covers a particular address:
3468 @smallexample
3469 (@value{GDBP}) info line *0x63ff
3470 Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.
3471 @end smallexample
3472
3473 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
3474 After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
3475 is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
3476 sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
3477 ,Examining memory}). Also, this address is saved as the value of the
3478 convenience variable @code{$_} (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3479 variables}).
3480
3481 @table @code
3482 @kindex disassemble
3483 @item disassemble
3484 @cindex assembly instructions
3485 @cindex instructions, assembly
3486 @cindex machine instructions
3487 @cindex listing machine instructions
3488 This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
3489 instructions. The default memory range is the function surrounding the
3490 program counter of the selected frame. A single argument to this
3491 command is a program counter value; the function surrounding this value
3492 will be dumped. Two arguments specify a range of addresses (first
3493 inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.
3494 @end table
3495
3496 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
3497 We can use @code{disassemble} to inspect the object code
3498 range shown in the last @code{info line} example (the example
3499 shows SPARC machine instructions):
3500
3501
3502 @smallexample
3503 (@value{GDBP}) disas 0x63e4 0x6404
3504 Dump of assembler code from 0x63e4 to 0x6404:
3505 0x63e4 <builtin_init+5340>: ble 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>
3506 0x63e8 <builtin_init+5344>: sethi %hi(0x4c00), %o0
3507 0x63ec <builtin_init+5348>: ld [%i1+4], %o0
3508 0x63f0 <builtin_init+5352>: b 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>
3509 0x63f4 <builtin_init+5356>: ld [%o0+4], %o0
3510 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>: or %o0, 0x1a4, %o0
3511 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>: call 0x9288 <path_search>
3512 0x6400 <builtin_init+5368>: nop
3513 End of assembler dump.
3514 @end smallexample
3515 @end ifclear
3516
3517 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
3518 For example, here is the beginning of the output for the
3519 disassembly of a function @code{fact}:
3520
3521
3522 @smallexample
3523 (@value{GDBP}) disas fact
3524 Dump of assembler code for function fact:
3525 to 0x808c:
3526 0x802c <fact>: 6d f2 mov.w r2,@@-r7
3527 0x802e <fact+2>: 6d f3 mov.w r3,@@-r7
3528 0x8030 <fact+4>: 6d f6 mov.w r6,@@-r7
3529 0x8032 <fact+6>: 0d 76 mov.w r7,r6
3530 0x8034 <fact+8>: 6f 70 00 08 mov.w @@(0x8,r7),r0
3531 0x8038 <fact+12> 19 11 sub.w r1,r1
3532 .
3533 .
3534 .
3535 @end smallexample
3536 @end ifset
3537
3538 @node Data
3539 @chapter Examining Data
3540
3541 @cindex printing data
3542 @cindex examining data
3543 @kindex print
3544 @kindex inspect
3545 @c "inspect" is not quite a synonym if you are using Epoch, which we do not
3546 @c document because it is nonstandard... Under Epoch it displays in a
3547 @c different window or something like that.
3548 The usual way to examine data in your program is with the @code{print}
3549 command (abbreviated @code{p}), or its synonym @code{inspect}.
3550 @ifclear CONLY
3551 It evaluates and prints the value of an expression of the language your
3552 program is written in (@pxref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3553 Languages}).
3554 @end ifclear
3555
3556 @table @code
3557 @item print @var{exp}
3558 @itemx print /@var{f} @var{exp}
3559 @var{exp} is an expression (in the source language). By default the
3560 value of @var{exp} is printed in a format appropriate to its data type;
3561 you can choose a different format by specifying @samp{/@var{f}}, where
3562 @var{f} is a letter specifying the format; @pxref{Output Formats,,Output
3563 formats}.
3564
3565 @item print
3566 @itemx print /@var{f}
3567 If you omit @var{exp}, @value{GDBN} displays the last value again (from the
3568 @dfn{value history}; @pxref{Value History, ,Value history}). This allows you to
3569 conveniently inspect the same value in an alternative format.
3570 @end table
3571
3572 A more low-level way of examining data is with the @code{x} command.
3573 It examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
3574 specified format. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
3575
3576 If you are interested in information about types, or about how the fields
3577 of a struct
3578 @ifclear CONLY
3579 or class
3580 @end ifclear
3581 are declared, use the @code{ptype @var{exp}}
3582 command rather than @code{print}. @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
3583
3584 @menu
3585 * Expressions:: Expressions
3586 * Variables:: Program variables
3587 * Arrays:: Artificial arrays
3588 * Output Formats:: Output formats
3589 * Memory:: Examining memory
3590 * Auto Display:: Automatic display
3591 * Print Settings:: Print settings
3592 * Value History:: Value history
3593 * Convenience Vars:: Convenience variables
3594 * Registers:: Registers
3595 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
3596 * Floating Point Hardware:: Floating point hardware
3597 @end ifclear
3598 @end menu
3599
3600 @node Expressions
3601 @section Expressions
3602
3603 @cindex expressions
3604 @code{print} and many other @value{GDBN} commands accept an expression and
3605 compute its value. Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined
3606 by the programming language you are using is valid in an expression in
3607 @value{GDBN}. This includes conditional expressions, function calls, casts
3608 and string constants. It unfortunately does not include symbols defined
3609 by preprocessor @code{#define} commands.
3610
3611 @ifclear CONLY
3612 Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
3613 this manual are in C. @xref{Languages, , Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3614 Languages}, for information on how to use expressions in other
3615 languages.
3616
3617 In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in @value{GDBN}
3618 expressions regardless of your programming language.
3619
3620 Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
3621 useful to cast a number into a pointer so as to examine a structure
3622 at that address in memory.
3623 @c FIXME: casts supported---Mod2 true?
3624 @end ifclear
3625
3626 @value{GDBN} supports these operators in addition to those of programming
3627 languages:
3628
3629 @table @code
3630 @item @@
3631 @samp{@@} is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
3632 @xref{Arrays, ,Artificial arrays}, for more information.
3633
3634 @item ::
3635 @samp{::} allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
3636 function where it is defined. @xref{Variables, ,Program variables}.
3637
3638 @item @{@var{type}@} @var{addr}
3639 @cindex @{@var{type}@}
3640 @cindex type casting memory
3641 @cindex memory, viewing as typed object
3642 @cindex casts, to view memory
3643 Refers to an object of type @var{type} stored at address @var{addr} in
3644 memory. @var{addr} may be any expression whose value is an integer or
3645 pointer (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
3646 a cast). This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of data is
3647 normally supposed to reside at @var{addr}.
3648 @end table
3649
3650 @node Variables
3651 @section Program variables
3652
3653 The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable
3654 in your program.
3655
3656 Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
3657 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}); they must either be global
3658 (or static) or be visible according to the scope rules of the
3659 programming language from the point of execution in that frame. This
3660 means that in the function
3661
3662 @example
3663 foo (a)
3664 int a;
3665 @{
3666 bar (a);
3667 @{
3668 int b = test ();
3669 bar (b);
3670 @}
3671 @}
3672 @end example
3673
3674 @noindent
3675 you can examine and use the variable @code{a} whenever your program is
3676 executing within the function @code{foo}, but you can only use or
3677 examine the variable @code{b} while your program is executing inside
3678 the block where @code{b} is declared.
3679
3680 @cindex variable name conflict
3681 There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
3682 scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
3683 in this file. But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
3684 function with the same name (in different source files). If that
3685 happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects. If you wish,
3686 you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
3687 using the colon-colon notation:
3688
3689 @cindex colon-colon
3690 @iftex
3691 @c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
3692 @kindex ::
3693 @end iftex
3694 @example
3695 @var{file}::@var{variable}
3696 @var{function}::@var{variable}
3697 @end example
3698
3699 @noindent
3700 Here @var{file} or @var{function} is the name of the context for the
3701 static @var{variable}. In the case of file names, you can use quotes to
3702 make sure @value{GDBN} parses the file name as a single word---for example,
3703 to print a global value of @code{x} defined in @file{f2.c}:
3704
3705 @example
3706 (@value{GDBP}) p 'f2.c'::x
3707 @end example
3708
3709 @ifclear CONLY
3710 @cindex C++ scope resolution
3711 This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
3712 use of the same notation in C++. @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C++
3713 scope resolution operator in @value{GDBN} expressions.
3714 @c FIXME: Um, so what happens in one of those rare cases where it's in
3715 @c conflict?? --mew
3716 @end ifclear
3717
3718 @cindex wrong values
3719 @cindex variable values, wrong
3720 @quotation
3721 @emph{Warning:} Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
3722 wrong value at certain points in a function---just after entry to a new
3723 scope, and just before exit.
3724 @end quotation
3725 You may see this problem when you are stepping by machine instructions.
3726 This is because on most machines, it takes more than one instruction to
3727 set up a stack frame (including local variable definitions); if you are
3728 stepping by machine instructions, variables may appear to have the wrong
3729 values until the stack frame is completely built. On exit, it usually
3730 also takes more than one machine instruction to destroy a stack frame;
3731 after you begin stepping through that group of instructions, local
3732 variable definitions may be gone.
3733
3734 @node Arrays
3735 @section Artificial arrays
3736
3737 @cindex artificial array
3738 @kindex @@
3739 It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
3740 same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
3741 dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
3742 program.
3743
3744 You can do this by referring to a contiguous span of memory as an
3745 @dfn{artificial array}, using the binary operator @samp{@@}. The left
3746 operand of @samp{@@} should be the first element of the desired array,
3747 as an individual object. The right operand should be the desired length
3748 of the array. The result is an array value whose elements are all of
3749 the type of the left argument. The first element is actually the left
3750 argument; the second element comes from bytes of memory immediately
3751 following those that hold the first element, and so on. Here is an
3752 example. If a program says
3753
3754 @example
3755 int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));
3756 @end example
3757
3758 @noindent
3759 you can print the contents of @code{array} with
3760
3761 @example
3762 p *array@@len
3763 @end example
3764
3765 The left operand of @samp{@@} must reside in memory. Array values made
3766 with @samp{@@} in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
3767 subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
3768 Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
3769 (@pxref{Value History, ,Value history}), after printing one out.
3770
3771 Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
3772 moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
3773 actually be adjacent---for example, if you are interested in the values
3774 of pointers in an array. One useful work-around in this situation is
3775 to use a convenience variable (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3776 variables}) as a counter in an expression that prints the first
3777 interesting value, and then repeat that expression via @key{RET}. For
3778 instance, suppose you have an array @code{dtab} of pointers to
3779 structures, and you are interested in the values of a field @code{fv}
3780 in each structure. Here is an example of what you might type:
3781
3782 @example
3783 set $i = 0
3784 p dtab[$i++]->fv
3785 @key{RET}
3786 @key{RET}
3787 @dots{}
3788 @end example
3789
3790 @node Output Formats
3791 @section Output formats
3792
3793 @cindex formatted output
3794 @cindex output formats
3795 By default, @value{GDBN} prints a value according to its data type. Sometimes
3796 this is not what you want. For example, you might want to print a number
3797 in hex, or a pointer in decimal. Or you might want to view data in memory
3798 at a certain address as a character string or as an instruction. To do
3799 these things, specify an @dfn{output format} when you print a value.
3800
3801 The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
3802 already computed. This is done by starting the arguments of the
3803 @code{print} command with a slash and a format letter. The format
3804 letters supported are:
3805
3806 @table @code
3807 @item x
3808 Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer in
3809 hexadecimal.
3810
3811 @item d
3812 Print as integer in signed decimal.
3813
3814 @item u
3815 Print as integer in unsigned decimal.
3816
3817 @item o
3818 Print as integer in octal.
3819
3820 @item t
3821 Print as integer in binary. The letter @samp{t} stands for ``two''.
3822 @footnote{@samp{b} cannot be used because these format letters are also
3823 used with the @code{x} command, where @samp{b} stands for ``byte'';
3824 @pxref{Memory,,Examining memory}.}
3825
3826 @item a
3827 Print as an address, both absolute in hex and as an offset from the
3828 nearest preceding symbol. This format can be used to discover where (in
3829 what function) an unknown address is located:
3830
3831 @example
3832 (@value{GDBP}) p/a 0x54320
3833 $3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>
3834 @end example
3835
3836 @item c
3837 Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.
3838
3839 @item f
3840 Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
3841 using typical floating point syntax.
3842 @end table
3843
3844 For example, to print the program counter in hex (@pxref{Registers}), type
3845
3846 @example
3847 p/x $pc
3848 @end example
3849
3850 @noindent
3851 Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
3852 names in @value{GDBN} cannot contain a slash.
3853
3854 To reprint the last value in the value history with a different format,
3855 you can use the @code{print} command with just a format and no
3856 expression. For example, @samp{p/x} reprints the last value in hex.
3857
3858 @node Memory
3859 @section Examining memory
3860
3861 You can use the command @code{x} (for ``examine'') to examine memory in
3862 any of several formats, independently of your program's data types.
3863
3864 @cindex examining memory
3865 @table @code
3866 @kindex x
3867 @item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
3868 @itemx x @var{addr}
3869 @itemx x
3870 Use the @code{x} command to examine memory.
3871 @end table
3872
3873 @var{n}, @var{f}, and @var{u} are all optional parameters that specify how
3874 much memory to display and how to format it; @var{addr} is an
3875 expression giving the address where you want to start displaying memory.
3876 If you use defaults for @var{nfu}, you need not type the slash @samp{/}.
3877 Several commands set convenient defaults for @var{addr}.
3878
3879 @table @r
3880 @item @var{n}, the repeat count
3881 The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1. It specifies
3882 how much memory (counting by units @var{u}) to display.
3883 @c This really is **decimal**; unaffected by 'set radix' as of GDB
3884 @c 4.1.2.
3885
3886 @item @var{f}, the display format
3887 The display format is one of the formats used by @code{print},
3888 or @samp{s} (null-terminated string) or @samp{i} (machine instruction).
3889 The default is @samp{x} (hexadecimal) initially, or the format from the
3890 last time you used either @code{x} or @code{print}.
3891
3892 @item @var{u}, the unit size
3893 The unit size is any of
3894
3895 @table @code
3896 @item b
3897 Bytes.
3898 @item h
3899 Halfwords (two bytes).
3900 @item w
3901 Words (four bytes). This is the initial default.
3902 @item g
3903 Giant words (eight bytes).
3904 @end table
3905
3906 Each time you specify a unit size with @code{x}, that size becomes the
3907 default unit the next time you use @code{x}. (For the @samp{s} and
3908 @samp{i} formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)
3909
3910 @item @var{addr}, starting display address
3911 @var{addr} is the address where you want @value{GDBN} to begin displaying
3912 memory. The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may);
3913 it is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
3914 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on expressions. The default for
3915 @var{addr} is usually just after the last address examined---but several
3916 other commands also set the default address: @code{info breakpoints} (to
3917 the address of the last breakpoint listed), @code{info line} (to the
3918 starting address of a line), and @code{print} (if you use it to display
3919 a value from memory).
3920 @end table
3921
3922 For example, @samp{x/3uh 0x54320} is a request to display three halfwords
3923 (@code{h}) of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (@samp{u}),
3924 starting at address @code{0x54320}. @samp{x/4xw $sp} prints the four
3925 words (@samp{w}) of memory above the stack pointer (here, @samp{$sp};
3926 @pxref{Registers}) in hexadecimal (@samp{x}).
3927
3928 Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
3929 letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
3930 unit size or format comes first; either order will work. The output
3931 specifications @samp{4xw} and @samp{4wx} mean exactly the same thing.
3932 (However, the count @var{n} must come first; @samp{wx4} will not work.)
3933
3934 Even though the unit size @var{u} is ignored for the formats @samp{s}
3935 and @samp{i}, you might still want to use a count @var{n}; for example,
3936 @samp{3i} specifies that you want to see three machine instructions,
3937 including any operands. The command @code{disassemble} gives an
3938 alternative way of inspecting machine instructions; @pxref{Machine
3939 Code,,Source and machine code}.
3940
3941 All the defaults for the arguments to @code{x} are designed to make it
3942 easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
3943 you use @code{x}. For example, after you have inspected three machine
3944 instructions with @samp{x/3i @var{addr}}, you can inspect the next seven
3945 with just @samp{x/7}. If you use @key{RET} to repeat the @code{x} command,
3946 the repeat count @var{n} is used again; the other arguments default as
3947 for successive uses of @code{x}.
3948
3949 @cindex @code{$_}, @code{$__}, and value history
3950 The addresses and contents printed by the @code{x} command are not saved
3951 in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
3952 would get in the way. Instead, @value{GDBN} makes these values available for
3953 subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
3954 @code{$_} and @code{$__}. After an @code{x} command, the last address
3955 examined is available for use in expressions in the convenience variable
3956 @code{$_}. The contents of that address, as examined, are available in
3957 the convenience variable @code{$__}.
3958
3959 If the @code{x} command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
3960 are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
3961 address printed if several units were printed on the last line of output.
3962
3963 @node Auto Display
3964 @section Automatic display
3965 @cindex automatic display
3966 @cindex display of expressions
3967
3968 If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
3969 (to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the @dfn{automatic
3970 display list} so that @value{GDBN} will print its value each time your program stops.
3971 Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it;
3972 to remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.
3973 The automatic display looks like this:
3974
3975 @example
3976 2: foo = 38
3977 3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804
3978 @end example
3979
3980 @noindent
3981 This display shows item numbers, expressions and their current values. As with
3982 displays you request manually using @code{x} or @code{print}, you can
3983 specify the output format you prefer; in fact, @code{display} decides
3984 whether to use @code{print} or @code{x} depending on how elaborate your
3985 format specification is---it uses @code{x} if you specify a unit size,
3986 or one of the two formats (@samp{i} and @samp{s}) that are only
3987 supported by @code{x}; otherwise it uses @code{print}.
3988
3989 @table @code
3990 @item display @var{exp}
3991 @kindex display
3992 Add the expression @var{exp} to the list of expressions to display
3993 each time your program stops. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
3994
3995 @code{display} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
3996
3997 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{exp}
3998 For @var{fmt} specifying only a display format and not a size or
3999 count, add the expression @var{exp} to the auto-display list but
4000 arrange to display it each time in the specified format @var{fmt}.
4001 @xref{Output Formats,,Output formats}.
4002
4003 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{addr}
4004 For @var{fmt} @samp{i} or @samp{s}, or including a unit-size or a
4005 number of units, add the expression @var{addr} as a memory address to
4006 be examined each time your program stops. Examining means in effect
4007 doing @samp{x/@var{fmt} @var{addr}}. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
4008 @end table
4009
4010 For example, @samp{display/i $pc} can be helpful, to see the machine
4011 instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (@samp{$pc}
4012 is a common name for the program counter; @pxref{Registers}).
4013
4014 @table @code
4015 @item undisplay @var{dnums}@dots{}
4016 @itemx delete display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4017 @kindex delete display
4018 @kindex undisplay
4019 Remove item numbers @var{dnums} from the list of expressions to display.
4020
4021 @code{undisplay} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
4022 (Otherwise you would just get the error @samp{No display number @dots{}}.)
4023
4024 @item disable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4025 @kindex disable display
4026 Disable the display of item numbers @var{dnums}. A disabled display
4027 item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten. It may be
4028 enabled again later.
4029
4030 @item enable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4031 @kindex enable display
4032 Enable display of item numbers @var{dnums}. It becomes effective once
4033 again in auto display of its expression, until you specify otherwise.
4034
4035 @item display
4036 Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as is
4037 done when your program stops.
4038
4039 @item info display
4040 @kindex info display
4041 Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
4042 automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing the
4043 values. This includes disabled expressions, which are marked as such.
4044 It also includes expressions which would not be displayed right now
4045 because they refer to automatic variables not currently available.
4046 @end table
4047
4048 If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not make
4049 sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up. Such an
4050 expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
4051 variables is not defined. For example, if you give the command
4052 @code{display last_char} while inside a function with an argument
4053 @code{last_char}, then this argument will be displayed while your program
4054 continues to stop inside that function. When it stops elsewhere---where
4055 there is no variable @code{last_char}---display is disabled. The next time
4056 your program stops where @code{last_char} is meaningful, you can enable the
4057 display expression once again.
4058
4059 @node Print Settings
4060 @section Print settings
4061
4062 @cindex format options
4063 @cindex print settings
4064 @value{GDBN} provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures,
4065 and symbols are printed.
4066
4067 @noindent
4068 These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:
4069
4070 @table @code
4071 @item set print address
4072 @itemx set print address on
4073 @kindex set print address
4074 @value{GDBN} will print memory addresses showing the location of stack
4075 traces, structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth,
4076 even when it also displays the contents of those addresses. The default
4077 is on. For example, this is what a stack frame display looks like, with
4078 @code{set print address on}:
4079
4080 @smallexample
4081 @group
4082 (@value{GDBP}) f
4083 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
4084 at input.c:530
4085 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4086 @end group
4087 @end smallexample
4088
4089 @item set print address off
4090 Do not print addresses when displaying their contents. For example,
4091 this is the same stack frame displayed with @code{set print address off}:
4092
4093 @smallexample
4094 @group
4095 (@value{GDBP}) set print addr off
4096 (@value{GDBP}) f
4097 #0 set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
4098 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4099 @end group
4100 @end smallexample
4101
4102 You can use @samp{set print address off} to eliminate all machine
4103 dependent displays from the @value{GDBN} interface. For example, with
4104 @code{print address off}, you should get the same text for backtraces on
4105 all machines---whether or not they involve pointer arguments.
4106
4107 @item show print address
4108 @kindex show print address
4109 Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.
4110 @end table
4111
4112 When @value{GDBN} prints a symbolic address, it normally prints the
4113 closest earlier symbol plus an offset. If that symbol does not uniquely
4114 identify the address (for example, it is a name whose scope is a single
4115 source file), you may need to disambiguate. One way to do this is with
4116 @code{info line}, for example @code{info line *0x4537}. Alternately,
4117 you can set @value{GDBN} to print the source file and line number when
4118 it prints a symbolic address:
4119
4120 @table @code
4121 @item set print symbol-filename on
4122 @kindex set print symbol-filename
4123 Tell @value{GDBN} to print the source file name and line number of a
4124 symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4125
4126 @item set print symbol-filename off
4127 Do not print source file name and line number of a symbol. This is the
4128 default.
4129
4130 @item show print symbol-filename
4131 @kindex show print symbol-filename
4132 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print the source file name and
4133 line number of a symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4134 @end table
4135
4136 Also, you may wish to see the symbolic form only if the address being
4137 printed is reasonably close to the closest earlier symbol:
4138
4139 @table @code
4140 @item set print max-symbolic-offset @var{max-offset}
4141 @kindex set print max-symbolic-offset
4142 Tell @value{GDBN} to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
4143 offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less than
4144 @var{max-offset}. The default is 0, which means to always print the
4145 symbolic form of an address, if any symbol precedes it.
4146
4147 @item show print max-symbolic-offset
4148 @kindex show print max-symbolic-offset
4149 Ask how large the maximum offset is that @value{GDBN} will print in a
4150 symbolic address.
4151 @end table
4152
4153 @table @code
4154 @item set print array
4155 @itemx set print array on
4156 @kindex set print array
4157 @value{GDBN} will pretty-print arrays. This format is more convenient to read,
4158 but uses more space. The default is off.
4159
4160 @item set print array off
4161 Return to compressed format for arrays.
4162
4163 @item show print array
4164 @kindex show print array
4165 Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
4166 arrays.
4167
4168 @item set print elements @var{number-of-elements}
4169 @kindex set print elements
4170 If @value{GDBN} is printing a large array, it will stop printing after it has
4171 printed the number of elements set by the @code{set print elements} command.
4172 This limit also applies to the display of strings.
4173 Setting the number of elements to zero means that the printing is unlimited.
4174
4175 @item show print elements
4176 @kindex show print elements
4177 Display the number of elements of a large array that @value{GDBN} will print
4178 before losing patience.
4179
4180 @item set print pretty on
4181 @kindex set print pretty
4182 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member per
4183 line, like this:
4184
4185 @smallexample
4186 @group
4187 $1 = @{
4188 next = 0x0,
4189 flags = @{
4190 sweet = 1,
4191 sour = 1
4192 @},
4193 meat = 0x54 "Pork"
4194 @}
4195 @end group
4196 @end smallexample
4197
4198 @item set print pretty off
4199 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in a compact format, like this:
4200
4201 @smallexample
4202 @group
4203 $1 = @{next = 0x0, flags = @{sweet = 1, sour = 1@}, \
4204 meat = 0x54 "Pork"@}
4205 @end group
4206 @end smallexample
4207
4208 @noindent
4209 This is the default format.
4210
4211 @item show print pretty
4212 @kindex show print pretty
4213 Show which format @value{GDBN} will use to print structures.
4214
4215 @item set print sevenbit-strings on
4216 @kindex set print sevenbit-strings
4217 Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set,
4218 @value{GDBN} will display any eight-bit characters (in strings or character
4219 values) using the notation @code{\}@var{nnn}. For example, @kbd{M-a} is
4220 displayed as @code{\341}.
4221
4222 @item set print sevenbit-strings off
4223 Print using either seven-bit or eight-bit characters, as required. This
4224 is the default.
4225
4226 @item show print sevenbit-strings
4227 @kindex show print sevenbit-strings
4228 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print only seven-bit characters.
4229
4230 @item set print union on
4231 @kindex set print union
4232 Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures. This is the
4233 default setting.
4234
4235 @item set print union off
4236 Tell @value{GDBN} not to print unions which are contained in structures.
4237
4238 @item show print union
4239 @kindex show print union
4240 Ask @value{GDBN} whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
4241 structures.
4242
4243 For example, given the declarations
4244
4245 @smallexample
4246 typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
4247 typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
4248 typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
4249 Bug_forms;
4250
4251 struct thing @{
4252 Species it;
4253 union @{
4254 Tree_forms tree;
4255 Bug_forms bug;
4256 @} form;
4257 @};
4258
4259 struct thing foo = @{Tree, @{Acorn@}@};
4260 @end smallexample
4261
4262 @noindent
4263 with @code{set print union on} in effect @samp{p foo} would print
4264
4265 @smallexample
4266 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon@}@}
4267 @end smallexample
4268
4269 @noindent
4270 and with @code{set print union off} in effect it would print
4271
4272 @smallexample
4273 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{...@}@}
4274 @end smallexample
4275 @end table
4276
4277 @ifclear CONLY
4278 @need 1000
4279 @noindent
4280 These settings are of interest when debugging C++ programs:
4281
4282 @table @code
4283 @item set print demangle
4284 @itemx set print demangle on
4285 @kindex set print demangle
4286 Print C++ names in their source form rather than in the encoded
4287 (``mangled'') form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
4288 linkage. The default is @samp{on}.
4289
4290 @item show print demangle
4291 @kindex show print demangle
4292 Show whether C++ names will be printed in mangled or demangled form.
4293
4294 @item set print asm-demangle
4295 @itemx set print asm-demangle on
4296 @kindex set print asm-demangle
4297 Print C++ names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
4298 in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
4299 The default is off.
4300
4301 @item show print asm-demangle
4302 @kindex show print asm-demangle
4303 Show whether C++ names in assembly listings will be printed in mangled
4304 or demangled form.
4305
4306 @item set demangle-style @var{style}
4307 @kindex set demangle-style
4308 @cindex C++ symbol decoding style
4309 @cindex symbol decoding style, C++
4310 Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers to
4311 represent C++ names. The choices for @var{style} are currently:
4312
4313 @table @code
4314 @item auto
4315 Allow @value{GDBN} to choose a decoding style by inspecting your program.
4316
4317 @item gnu
4318 Decode based on the GNU C++ compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
4319
4320 @item lucid
4321 Decode based on the Lucid C++ compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
4322
4323 @item arm
4324 Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C++ Annotated Reference Manual}.
4325 @strong{Warning:} this setting alone is not sufficient to allow
4326 debugging @code{cfront}-generated executables. @value{GDBN} would
4327 require further enhancement to permit that.
4328 @end table
4329
4330 @item show demangle-style
4331 @kindex show demangle-style
4332 Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C++ symbols.
4333
4334 @item set print object
4335 @itemx set print object on
4336 @kindex set print object
4337 When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the @emph{actual}
4338 (derived) type of the object rather than the @emph{declared} type, using
4339 the virtual function table.
4340
4341 @item set print object off
4342 Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
4343 virtual function table. This is the default setting.
4344
4345 @item show print object
4346 @kindex show print object
4347 Show whether actual, or declared, object types will be displayed.
4348
4349 @item set print vtbl
4350 @itemx set print vtbl on
4351 @kindex set print vtbl
4352 Pretty print C++ virtual function tables. The default is off.
4353
4354 @item set print vtbl off
4355 Do not pretty print C++ virtual function tables.
4356
4357 @item show print vtbl
4358 @kindex show print vtbl
4359 Show whether C++ virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
4360 @end table
4361 @end ifclear
4362
4363 @node Value History
4364 @section Value history
4365
4366 @cindex value history
4367 Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN} @dfn{value
4368 history} so that you can refer to them in other expressions. Values are
4369 kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded (for example with
4370 the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands). When the symbol table
4371 changes, the value history is discarded, since the values may contain
4372 pointers back to the types defined in the symbol table.
4373
4374 @cindex @code{$}
4375 @cindex @code{$$}
4376 @cindex history number
4377 The values printed are given @dfn{history numbers} by which you can
4378 refer to them. These are successive integers starting with one.
4379 @code{print} shows you the history number assigned to a value by
4380 printing @samp{$@var{num} = } before the value; here @var{num} is the
4381 history number.
4382
4383 To refer to any previous value, use @samp{$} followed by the value's
4384 history number. The way @code{print} labels its output is designed to
4385 remind you of this. Just @code{$} refers to the most recent value in
4386 the history, and @code{$$} refers to the value before that.
4387 @code{$$@var{n}} refers to the @var{n}th value from the end; @code{$$2}
4388 is the value just prior to @code{$$}, @code{$$1} is equivalent to
4389 @code{$$}, and @code{$$0} is equivalent to @code{$}.
4390
4391 For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure and
4392 want to see the contents of the structure. It suffices to type
4393
4394 @example
4395 p *$
4396 @end example
4397
4398 If you have a chain of structures where the component @code{next} points
4399 to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:
4400
4401 @example
4402 p *$.next
4403 @end example
4404
4405 @noindent
4406 You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
4407 command---which you can do by just typing @key{RET}.
4408
4409 Note that the history records values, not expressions. If the value of
4410 @code{x} is 4 and you type these commands:
4411
4412 @example
4413 print x
4414 set x=5
4415 @end example
4416
4417 @noindent
4418 then the value recorded in the value history by the @code{print} command
4419 remains 4 even though the value of @code{x} has changed.
4420
4421 @table @code
4422 @kindex show values
4423 @item show values
4424 Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item numbers.
4425 This is like @samp{p@ $$9} repeated ten times, except that @code{show
4426 values} does not change the history.
4427
4428 @item show values @var{n}
4429 Print ten history values centered on history item number @var{n}.
4430
4431 @item show values +
4432 Print ten history values just after the values last printed. If no more
4433 values are available, produces no display.
4434 @end table
4435
4436 Pressing @key{RET} to repeat @code{show values @var{n}} has exactly the
4437 same effect as @samp{show values +}.
4438
4439 @node Convenience Vars
4440 @section Convenience variables
4441
4442 @cindex convenience variables
4443 @value{GDBN} provides @dfn{convenience variables} that you can use within
4444 @value{GDBN} to hold on to a value and refer to it later. These variables
4445 exist entirely within @value{GDBN}; they are not part of your program, and
4446 setting a convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution
4447 of your program. That is why you can use them freely.
4448
4449 Convenience variables are prefixed with @samp{$}. Any name preceded by
4450 @samp{$} can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of
4451 the predefined machine-specific register names (@pxref{Registers}).
4452 (Value history references, in contrast, are @emph{numbers} preceded
4453 by @samp{$}. @xref{Value History, ,Value history}.)
4454
4455 You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
4456 expression, just as you would set a variable in your program.
4457 For example:
4458
4459 @example
4460 set $foo = *object_ptr
4461 @end example
4462
4463 @noindent
4464 would save in @code{$foo} the value contained in the object pointed to by
4465 @code{object_ptr}.
4466
4467 Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it, but its
4468 value is @code{void} until you assign a new value. You can alter the
4469 value with another assignment at any time.
4470
4471 Convenience variables have no fixed types. You can assign a convenience
4472 variable any type of value, including structures and arrays, even if
4473 that variable already has a value of a different type. The convenience
4474 variable, when used as an expression, has the type of its current value.
4475
4476 @table @code
4477 @item show convenience
4478 @kindex show convenience
4479 Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their values.
4480 Abbreviated @code{show con}.
4481 @end table
4482
4483 One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
4484 incremented or a pointer to be advanced. For example, to print
4485 a field from successive elements of an array of structures:
4486
4487 @example
4488 set $i = 0
4489 print bar[$i++]->contents
4490 @i{@dots{} repeat that command by typing @key{RET}.}
4491 @end example
4492
4493 Some convenience variables are created automatically by @value{GDBN} and given
4494 values likely to be useful.
4495
4496 @table @code
4497 @item $_
4498 @kindex $_
4499 The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
4500 the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}). Other
4501 commands which provide a default address for @code{x} to examine also
4502 set @code{$_} to that address; these commands include @code{info line}
4503 and @code{info breakpoint}. The type of @code{$_} is @code{void *}
4504 except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
4505 to the type of @code{$__}.
4506
4507 @item $__
4508 @kindex $__
4509 The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
4510 to the value found in the last address examined. Its type is chosen
4511 to match the format in which the data was printed.
4512 @end table
4513
4514 @node Registers
4515 @section Registers
4516
4517 @cindex registers
4518 You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
4519 with names starting with @samp{$}. The names of registers are different
4520 for each machine; use @code{info registers} to see the names used on
4521 your machine.
4522
4523 @table @code
4524 @item info registers
4525 @kindex info registers
4526 Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
4527 registers (in the selected stack frame).
4528
4529 @item info all-registers
4530 @kindex info all-registers
4531 @cindex floating point registers
4532 Print the names and values of all registers, including floating-point
4533 registers.
4534
4535 @item info registers @var{regname} @dots{}
4536 Print the relativized value of each specified register @var{regname}.
4537 @var{regname} may be any register name valid on the machine you are using, with
4538 or without the initial @samp{$}.
4539 @end table
4540
4541 @value{GDBN} has four ``standard'' register names that are available (in
4542 expressions) on most machines---whenever they do not conflict with an
4543 architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers. The register names
4544 @code{$pc} and @code{$sp} are used for the program counter register and
4545 the stack pointer. @code{$fp} is used for a register that contains a
4546 pointer to the current stack frame, and @code{$ps} is used for a
4547 register that contains the processor status. For example,
4548 you could print the program counter in hex with
4549
4550 @example
4551 p/x $pc
4552 @end example
4553
4554 @noindent
4555 or print the instruction to be executed next with
4556
4557 @example
4558 x/i $pc
4559 @end example
4560
4561 @noindent
4562 or add four to the stack pointer@footnote{This is a way of removing
4563 one word from the stack, on machines where stacks grow downward in
4564 memory (most machines, nowadays). This assumes that the innermost
4565 stack frame is selected; setting @code{$sp} is not allowed when other
4566 stack frames are selected. To pop entire frames off the stack,
4567 regardless of machine architecture, use @code{return};
4568 @pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}.} with
4569
4570 @example
4571 set $sp += 4
4572 @end example
4573
4574 Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available on
4575 your machine even though the machine has different canonical mnemonics,
4576 so long as there is no conflict. The @code{info registers} command
4577 shows the canonical names. For example, on the SPARC, @code{info
4578 registers} displays the processor status register as @code{$psr} but you
4579 can also refer to it as @code{$ps}.
4580
4581 @value{GDBN} always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
4582 integer when the register is examined in this way. Some machines have
4583 special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
4584 registers are considered to have floating point values. There is no way
4585 to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
4586 (although you can @emph{print} it as a floating point value with
4587 @samp{print/f $@var{regname}}).
4588
4589 Some registers have distinct ``raw'' and ``virtual'' data formats. This
4590 means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
4591 the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
4592 sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
4593 coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
4594 programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format. In such
4595 cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format that
4596 makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
4597 prints the data in both formats.
4598
4599 Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
4600 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). This means that you get the
4601 value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
4602 were exited and their saved registers restored. In order to see the
4603 true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
4604 frame (with @samp{frame 0}).
4605
4606 However, @value{GDBN} must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
4607 code generated by your compiler. If some registers are not saved, or if
4608 @value{GDBN} is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack
4609 frame will make no difference.
4610
4611 @ifset AMD29K
4612 @table @code
4613 @item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
4614 @kindex set rstack_high_address
4615 @cindex AMD 29K register stack
4616 @cindex register stack, AMD29K
4617 On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
4618 ``register stack''. There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the extent
4619 of this stack. Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the stack is ``large
4620 enough''. This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing memory locations that
4621 do not exist. If necessary, you can get around this problem by
4622 specifying the ending address of the register stack with the @code{set
4623 rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an address, which
4624 you will probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
4625 hexadecimal.
4626
4627 @item show rstack_high_address
4628 @kindex show rstack_high_address
4629 Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
4630 processors.
4631 @end table
4632 @end ifset
4633
4634 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
4635 @node Floating Point Hardware
4636 @section Floating point hardware
4637 @cindex floating point
4638
4639 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
4640 Depending on the host machine architecture, @value{GDBN} may be able to give
4641 you more information about the status of the floating point hardware.
4642
4643 @table @code
4644 @item info float
4645 @kindex info float
4646 Display hardware-dependent information about the floating
4647 point unit. The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
4648 floating point chip; on some platforms, @samp{info float} is not
4649 available at all.
4650 @end table
4651 @c FIXME: this is a cop-out. Try to get examples, explanations. Only
4652 @c FIXME...supported currently on arm's and 386's. Mark properly with
4653 @c FIXME... m4 macros to isolate general statements from hardware-dep,
4654 @c FIXME... at that point.
4655 @end ifclear
4656
4657 @ifclear CONLY
4658 @node Languages
4659 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
4660 @cindex languages
4661
4662 @ifset MOD2
4663 Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
4664 rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
4665 dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
4666 Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
4667 represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C are written
4668 like @samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
4669 @end ifset
4670
4671 @cindex working language
4672 Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
4673 allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
4674 native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
4675 consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
4676 language you use to build expressions, called the @dfn{working
4677 language}, can be selected manually, or @value{GDBN} can set it
4678 automatically.
4679
4680 @menu
4681 * Setting:: Switching between source languages
4682 * Show:: Displaying the language
4683 @ifset MOD2
4684 * Checks:: Type and range checks
4685 @end ifset
4686
4687 * Support:: Supported languages
4688 @end menu
4689
4690 @node Setting
4691 @section Switching between source languages
4692
4693 There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
4694 set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
4695 @code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, @value{GDBN}
4696 defaults to setting the language automatically.
4697
4698 @menu
4699 * Manually:: Setting the working language manually
4700 * Automatically:: Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
4701 @end menu
4702
4703 @node Manually
4704 @subsection Setting the working language
4705
4706 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
4707 expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
4708 your program.
4709
4710 @kindex set language
4711 If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue the
4712 command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
4713 a language, such as
4714 @ifclear MOD2
4715 @code{c}.
4716 @end ifclear
4717 @ifset MOD2
4718 @code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
4719 @end ifset
4720 For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
4721 @c FIXME: rms: eventually this command should be "help set language".
4722
4723 @ifset MOD2
4724 Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
4725 language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
4726 to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
4727 source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
4728 languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
4729 source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
4730 command such as:
4731
4732 @example
4733 print a = b + c
4734 @end example
4735
4736 @noindent
4737 might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
4738 @code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
4739 printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
4740 @code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
4741 @end ifset
4742
4743 @node Automatically
4744 @subsection Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
4745
4746 To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use @samp{set
4747 language local} or @samp{set language auto}. @value{GDBN} then infers the
4748 language that a program was written in by looking at the name of its
4749 source files, and examining their extensions:
4750
4751 @table @file
4752 @ifset MOD2
4753 @item *.mod
4754 Modula-2 source file
4755 @end ifset
4756
4757 @item *.c
4758 C source file
4759
4760 @item *.C
4761 @itemx *.cc
4762 C++ source file
4763 @end table
4764
4765 This information is recorded for each function or procedure in a source
4766 file. When your program stops in a frame (usually by encountering a
4767 breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the working language to the language recorded
4768 for the function in that frame. If the language for a frame is unknown
4769 (that is, if the function or block corresponding to the frame was
4770 defined in a source file that does not have a recognized extension), the
4771 current working language is not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
4772
4773 This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
4774 entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
4775 written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
4776 a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
4777 case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
4778
4779 @node Show
4780 @section Displaying the language
4781
4782 The following commands will help you find out which language is the
4783 working language, and also what language source files were written in.
4784
4785 @kindex show language
4786 @kindex info frame
4787 @kindex info source
4788 @table @code
4789 @item show language
4790 Display the current working language. This is the
4791 language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
4792 build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
4793
4794 @item info frame
4795 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information
4796 about a frame}) is the source language for this frame. This is the
4797 language that will become the working language if you ever use an
4798 identifier that is in this frame.
4799
4800 @item info source
4801 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Symbols, ,Examining the
4802 Symbol Table}) is the source language of this source file.
4803 @end table
4804
4805 @ifset MOD2
4806 @node Checks
4807 @section Type and range checking
4808
4809 @quotation
4810 @emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
4811 checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
4812 section documents the intended facilities.
4813 @end quotation
4814 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
4815
4816 Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
4817 errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
4818 checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
4819 sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
4820 these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
4821 by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
4822 errors when your program is running.
4823
4824 @value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
4825 Although @value{GDBN} will not check the statements in your program, it
4826 can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for evaluation via
4827 the @code{print} command, for example. As with the working language,
4828 @value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
4829 your program's source language. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages},
4830 for the default settings of supported languages.
4831
4832 @menu
4833 * Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
4834 * Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
4835 @end menu
4836
4837 @cindex type checking
4838 @cindex checks, type
4839 @node Type Checking
4840 @subsection An overview of type checking
4841
4842 Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
4843 arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
4844 otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
4845 errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
4846
4847 @example
4848 1 + 2 @result{} 3
4849 @exdent but
4850 @error{} 1 + 2.3
4851 @end example
4852
4853 The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
4854 type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
4855
4856 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the @value{GDBN}
4857 type checker to skip checking; to treat any mismatches as errors and
4858 abandon the expression; or only issue warnings when type mismatches
4859 occur, but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
4860 these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
4861 also issues a warning.
4862
4863 Even though you may turn type checking off, other type-based reasons may
4864 prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression. For instance, @value{GDBN} does not
4865 know how to add an @code{int} and a @code{struct foo}. These particular
4866 type errors have nothing to do with the language in use, and usually
4867 arise from expressions, such as the one described above, which make
4868 little sense to evaluate anyway.
4869
4870 Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
4871 instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
4872 operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
4873 represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
4874 operators. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for further
4875 details on specific languages.
4876
4877 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
4878
4879 @kindex set check
4880 @kindex set check type
4881 @kindex show check type
4882 @table @code
4883 @item set check type auto
4884 Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
4885 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
4886 each language.
4887
4888 @item set check type on
4889 @itemx set check type off
4890 Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
4891 current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
4892 match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
4893 evaluating an expression while typechecking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
4894 message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
4895
4896 @item set check type warn
4897 Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
4898 evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
4899 be impossible for other reasons. For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
4900 numbers and structures.
4901
4902 @item show type
4903 Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN} is
4904 setting it automatically.
4905 @end table
4906
4907 @cindex range checking
4908 @cindex checks, range
4909 @node Range Checking
4910 @subsection An overview of range checking
4911
4912 In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
4913 bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
4914 checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
4915 computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
4916 not exceed the bounds of the array.
4917
4918 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
4919 @value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
4920 always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
4921 warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
4922
4923 A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
4924 array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
4925 of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
4926 error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
4927 result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
4928 the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
4929
4930 @example
4931 @var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
4932 @end example
4933
4934 This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
4935 specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Support, ,
4936 Supported languages}, for further details on specific languages.
4937
4938 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
4939
4940 @kindex set check
4941 @kindex set check range
4942 @kindex show check range
4943 @table @code
4944 @item set check range auto
4945 Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
4946 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
4947 each language.
4948
4949 @item set check range on
4950 @itemx set check range off
4951 Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
4952 current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
4953 match the language default. If a range error occurs, then a message
4954 is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
4955
4956 @item set check range warn
4957 Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
4958 but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
4959 expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
4960 memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many Unix
4961 systems).
4962
4963 @item show range
4964 Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
4965 being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
4966 @end table
4967 @end ifset
4968
4969 @node Support
4970 @section Supported languages
4971
4972 @ifset MOD2
4973 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, C++, and Modula-2.
4974 @end ifset
4975 @ifclear MOD2
4976 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, and C++.
4977 @end ifclear
4978 Some @value{GDBN} features may be used in expressions regardless of the
4979 language you use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators,
4980 and the @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions,
4981 ,Expressions}) can be used with the constructs of any supported
4982 language.
4983
4984 The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
4985 supported by @value{GDBN}. These sections are not meant to be language
4986 tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
4987 @value{GDBN} expression parser will accept, and what input and output
4988 formats should look like for different languages. There are many good
4989 books written on each of these languages; please look to these for a
4990 language reference or tutorial.
4991
4992 @ifset MOD2
4993 @menu
4994 * C:: C and C++
4995 * Modula-2:: Modula-2
4996 @end menu
4997
4998 @node C
4999 @subsection C and C++
5000 @cindex C and C++
5001 @cindex expressions in C or C++
5002
5003 Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
5004 to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss both languages
5005 together.
5006 @end ifset
5007 @ifclear MOD2
5008 @c Cancel this below, under same condition, at end of this chapter!
5009 @raisesections
5010 @end ifclear
5011
5012 @cindex C++
5013 @kindex g++
5014 @cindex GNU C++
5015 The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the GNU C++
5016 compiler and @value{GDBN}. Therefore, to debug your C++ code effectively,
5017 you must compile your C++ programs with the GNU C++ compiler,
5018 @code{g++}.
5019 @end ifclear
5020 @ifset CONLY
5021 @node C
5022 @chapter C Language Support
5023 @cindex C language
5024 @cindex expressions in C
5025
5026 Information specific to the C language is built into @value{GDBN} so that you
5027 can use C expressions while degugging. This also permits @value{GDBN} to
5028 output values in a manner consistent with C conventions.
5029
5030 @menu
5031 * C Operators:: C operators
5032 * C Constants:: C constants
5033 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5034 @end menu
5035 @end ifset
5036 @ifclear CONLY
5037 @menu
5038 * C Operators:: C and C++ operators
5039 * C Constants:: C and C++ constants
5040 * Cplus expressions:: C++ expressions
5041 * C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
5042 @ifset MOD2
5043 * C Checks:: C and C++ type and range checks
5044 @end ifset
5045
5046 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5047 * Debugging C plus plus:: Special features for C++
5048 @end menu
5049 @end ifclear
5050
5051 @ifclear CONLY
5052 @cindex C and C++ operators
5053 @node C Operators
5054 @subsubsection C and C++ operators
5055 @end ifclear
5056 @ifset CONLY
5057 @cindex C operators
5058 @node C Operators
5059 @section C operators
5060 @end ifset
5061
5062 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5063 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5064 often defined on groups of types.
5065
5066 @ifclear CONLY
5067 For the purposes of C and C++, the following definitions hold:
5068 @end ifclear
5069
5070 @itemize @bullet
5071 @item
5072 @emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
5073 specifiers; @code{char}; and @code{enum}.
5074
5075 @item
5076 @emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float} and @code{double}.
5077
5078 @item
5079 @emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type}
5080 *)}.
5081
5082 @item
5083 @emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
5084 @end itemize
5085
5086 @noindent
5087 The following operators are supported. They are listed here
5088 in order of increasing precedence:
5089
5090 @table @code
5091 @item ,
5092 The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
5093 are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
5094 expression being the last expression evaluated.
5095
5096 @item =
5097 Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
5098 assigned. Defined on scalar types.
5099
5100 @item @var{op}=
5101 Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
5102 and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
5103 @w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precendence.
5104 @var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
5105 @code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
5106
5107 @item ?:
5108 The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
5109 of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
5110 integral type.
5111
5112 @item ||
5113 Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5114
5115 @item &&
5116 Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5117
5118 @item |
5119 Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5120
5121 @item ^
5122 Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5123
5124 @item &
5125 Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5126
5127 @item ==@r{, }!=
5128 Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
5129 expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
5130
5131 @item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
5132 Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
5133 Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
5134 and non-zero for true.
5135
5136 @item <<@r{, }>>
5137 left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
5138
5139 @item @@
5140 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5141
5142 @item +@r{, }-
5143 Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
5144 pointer types.
5145
5146 @item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
5147 Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
5148 defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
5149 integral types.
5150
5151 @item ++@r{, }--
5152 Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
5153 operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
5154 when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
5155 operation takes place.
5156
5157 @item *
5158 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
5159 @code{++}.
5160
5161 @item &
5162 Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
5163
5164 @ifclear CONLY
5165 For debugging C++, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
5166 allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
5167 (or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}}) to examine the address
5168 where a C++ reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
5169 stored.
5170 @end ifclear
5171
5172 @item -
5173 Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
5174 precedence as @code{++}.
5175
5176 @item !
5177 Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5178 @code{++}.
5179
5180 @item ~
5181 Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5182 @code{++}.
5183
5184
5185 @item .@r{, }->
5186 Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
5187 @value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
5188 pointer based on the stored type information.
5189 Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
5190
5191 @item []
5192 Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
5193 @code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5194
5195 @item ()
5196 Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5197
5198 @ifclear CONLY
5199 @item ::
5200 C++ scope resolution operator. Defined on
5201 @code{struct}, @code{union}, and @code{class} types.
5202 @end ifclear
5203
5204 @item ::
5205 Doubled colons
5206 @ifclear CONLY
5207 also
5208 @end ifclear
5209 represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@pxref{Expressions,
5210 ,Expressions}).
5211 @ifclear CONLY
5212 Same precedence as @code{::}, above.
5213 @end ifclear
5214 @end table
5215
5216 @ifclear CONLY
5217 @cindex C and C++ constants
5218 @node C Constants
5219 @subsubsection C and C++ constants
5220
5221 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the
5222 following ways:
5223 @end ifclear
5224 @ifset CONLY
5225 @cindex C constants
5226 @node C Constants
5227 @section C constants
5228
5229 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C in the
5230 following ways:
5231 @end ifset
5232
5233 @itemize @bullet
5234 @item
5235 Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
5236 specified by a leading @samp{0} (ie. zero), and hexadecimal constants by
5237 a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
5238 @samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
5239 @code{long} value.
5240
5241 @item
5242 Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
5243 point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
5244 exponent. An exponent is of the form:
5245 @samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
5246 sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
5247
5248 @item
5249 Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
5250 integral equivalents.
5251
5252 @item
5253 Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
5254 (@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
5255 (usually its @sc{ASCII} value). Within quotes, the single character may
5256 be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
5257 the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
5258 of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
5259 @samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
5260 @samp{\n} for newline.
5261
5262 @item
5263 String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
5264 by double quotes (@code{"}).
5265
5266 @item
5267 Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write pointers
5268 to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
5269
5270 @item
5271 Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
5272 and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
5273 integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
5274 and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
5275 @end itemize
5276
5277 @ifclear CONLY
5278 @node Cplus expressions
5279 @subsubsection C++ expressions
5280
5281 @cindex expressions in C++
5282 @value{GDBN} expression handling has a number of extensions to
5283 interpret a significant subset of C++ expressions.
5284
5285 @cindex C++ support, not in @sc{coff}
5286 @cindex @sc{coff} versus C++
5287 @cindex C++ and object formats
5288 @cindex object formats and C++
5289 @cindex a.out and C++
5290 @cindex @sc{ecoff} and C++
5291 @cindex @sc{xcoff} and C++
5292 @cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C++
5293 @cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C++
5294 @quotation
5295 @emph{Warning:} Most of these extensions depend on the use of additional
5296 debugging information in the symbol table, and thus require a rich,
5297 extendable object code format. In particular, if your system uses
5298 a.out, MIPS @sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or Sun @sc{elf} with stabs
5299 extensions to the symbol table, these facilities are all available.
5300 Where the object code format is standard @sc{coff}, on the other hand,
5301 most of the C++ support in @value{GDBN} will @emph{not} work, nor can it.
5302 For the standard SVr4 debugging format, @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, the
5303 standard is still evolving, so the C++ support in @value{GDBN} is still
5304 fragile; when this debugging format stabilizes, however, C++ support
5305 will also be available on systems that use it.
5306 @end quotation
5307
5308 @enumerate
5309
5310 @cindex member functions
5311 @item
5312 Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
5313
5314 @example
5315 count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
5316 @end example
5317
5318 @kindex this
5319 @cindex namespace in C++
5320 @item
5321 While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
5322 expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
5323 that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
5324 pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C++.
5325
5326 @cindex call overloaded functions
5327 @cindex type conversions in C++
5328 @item
5329 You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} will resolve the function
5330 call to the right definition, with one restriction---you must use
5331 arguments of the type required by the function that you want to call.
5332 @value{GDBN} will not perform conversions requiring constructors or
5333 user-defined type operators.
5334
5335 @cindex reference declarations
5336 @item
5337 @value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use them in
5338 expressions just as you do in C++ source---they are automatically
5339 dereferenced.
5340
5341 In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
5342 reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
5343 avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
5344 The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
5345 you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
5346
5347 @item
5348 @value{GDBN} supports the C++ name resolution operator @code{::}---your
5349 expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
5350 one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
5351 necessary, for example in an expression like
5352 @samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. @value{GDBN} also allows
5353 resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C++
5354 debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program variables}).
5355 @end enumerate
5356
5357 @node C Defaults
5358 @subsubsection C and C++ defaults
5359 @cindex C and C++ defaults
5360
5361 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
5362 both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
5363 C or C++. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5364 selected the working language.
5365
5366 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it sets the
5367 working language to C or C++ on entering code compiled from a source file
5368 whose name ends with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or @file{.cc}.
5369 @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language}, for
5370 further details.
5371
5372 @ifset MOD2
5373 @c Type checking is (a) primarily motivated by Modula-2, and (b)
5374 @c unimplemented. If (b) changes, it might make sense to let this node
5375 @c appear even if Mod-2 does not, but meanwhile ignore it. pesch 16jul93.
5376 @node C Checks
5377 @subsubsection C and C++ type and range checks
5378 @cindex C and C++ checks
5379
5380 By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C++ expressions, type checking
5381 is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN} will
5382 consider two variables type equivalent if:
5383
5384 @itemize @bullet
5385 @item
5386 The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
5387 enumerated tag.
5388
5389 @item
5390 Two two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
5391 declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
5392
5393 @ignore
5394 @c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
5395 @c FIXME--beers?
5396 @item
5397 The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
5398 declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
5399 compilers.)
5400 @end ignore
5401 @end itemize
5402
5403 Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
5404 indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
5405 that is not itself an array.
5406 @end ifset
5407 @end ifclear
5408
5409 @ifclear CONLY
5410 @node Debugging C
5411 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
5412 @end ifclear
5413 @ifset CONLY
5414 @node Debugging C
5415 @section @value{GDBN} and C
5416 @end ifset
5417
5418 The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
5419 the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
5420 inside a @code{struct}
5421 @ifclear CONLY
5422 or @code{class}
5423 @end ifclear
5424 will also be printed.
5425 Otherwise, it will appear as @samp{@{...@}}.
5426
5427 The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
5428 with pointers and a memory allocation function. @xref{Expressions,
5429 ,Expressions}.
5430
5431 @ifclear CONLY
5432 @node Debugging C plus plus
5433 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} features for C++
5434
5435 @cindex commands for C++
5436 Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
5437 designed specifically for use with C++. Here is a summary:
5438
5439 @table @code
5440 @cindex break in overloaded functions
5441 @item @r{breakpoint menus}
5442 When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
5443 @value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
5444 you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}.
5445
5446 @cindex overloading in C++
5447 @item rbreak @var{regex}
5448 Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
5449 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
5450 classes.
5451 @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.
5452
5453 @cindex C++ exception handling
5454 @item catch @var{exceptions}
5455 @itemx info catch
5456 Debug C++ exception handling using these commands. @xref{Exception
5457 Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
5458
5459 @cindex inheritance
5460 @item ptype @var{typename}
5461 Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
5462 @var{typename}.
5463 @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
5464
5465 @cindex C++ symbol display
5466 @item set print demangle
5467 @itemx show print demangle
5468 @itemx set print asm-demangle
5469 @itemx show print asm-demangle
5470 Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
5471 displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
5472 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5473
5474 @item set print object
5475 @itemx show print object
5476 Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
5477 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5478
5479 @item set print vtbl
5480 @itemx show print vtbl
5481 Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
5482 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5483
5484 @item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
5485 You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
5486 the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C++: type
5487 @code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
5488 also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
5489 available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
5490 @xref{Completion,, Command completion}, for details on how to do this.
5491 @end table
5492 @ifclear MOD2
5493 @c cancels "raisesections" under same conditions near bgn of chapter
5494 @lowersections
5495 @end ifclear
5496
5497 @ifset MOD2
5498 @node Modula-2
5499 @subsection Modula-2
5500 @cindex Modula-2
5501
5502 The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
5503 output from the GNU Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
5504 developed). Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
5505 attempting to debug executables produced by them will most likely
5506 result in an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
5507 table.
5508
5509 @cindex expressions in Modula-2
5510 @menu
5511 * M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
5512 * Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
5513 * M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
5514 * M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
5515 * Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
5516 * M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
5517 * M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5518 * GDB/M2:: @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5519 @end menu
5520
5521 @node M2 Operators
5522 @subsubsection Operators
5523 @cindex Modula-2 operators
5524
5525 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5526 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5527 often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
5528 following definitions hold:
5529
5530 @itemize @bullet
5531
5532 @item
5533 @emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
5534 their subranges.
5535
5536 @item
5537 @emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
5538
5539 @item
5540 @emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
5541
5542 @item
5543 @emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
5544 @var{type}}.
5545
5546 @item
5547 @emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
5548
5549 @item
5550 @emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
5551
5552 @item
5553 @emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
5554 @end itemize
5555
5556 @noindent
5557 The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
5558 increasing precedence:
5559
5560 @table @code
5561 @item ,
5562 Function argument or array index separator.
5563
5564 @item :=
5565 Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
5566 @var{value}.
5567
5568 @item <@r{, }>
5569 Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
5570 types.
5571
5572 @item <=@r{, }>=
5573 Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
5574 on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
5575 set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
5576
5577 @item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
5578 Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
5579 Same precedence as @code{<}. In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
5580 available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
5581 comment character.
5582
5583 @item IN
5584 Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
5585 Same precedence as @code{<}.
5586
5587 @item OR
5588 Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
5589
5590 @item AND@r{, }&
5591 Boolean conjuction. Defined on boolean types.
5592
5593 @item @@
5594 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5595
5596 @item +@r{, }-
5597 Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
5598 and difference on set types.
5599
5600 @item *
5601 Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
5602 on set types.
5603
5604 @item /
5605 Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
5606 types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
5607
5608 @item DIV@r{, }MOD
5609 Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
5610 precedence as @code{*}.
5611
5612 @item -
5613 Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
5614
5615 @item ^
5616 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
5617
5618 @item NOT
5619 Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
5620 @code{^}.
5621
5622 @item .
5623 @code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD} data. Same
5624 precedence as @code{^}.
5625
5626 @item []
5627 Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY} data. Same precedence as @code{^}.
5628
5629 @item ()
5630 Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects. Same precedence
5631 as @code{^}.
5632
5633 @item ::@r{, }.
5634 @value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
5635 @end table
5636
5637 @quotation
5638 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
5639 will treat the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
5640 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
5641 @code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
5642 @end quotation
5643
5644 @cindex Modula-2 built-ins
5645 @node Built-In Func/Proc
5646 @subsubsection Built-in functions and procedures
5647
5648 Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
5649 In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
5650
5651 @table @var
5652
5653 @item a
5654 represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
5655
5656 @item c
5657 represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
5658
5659 @item i
5660 represents a variable or constant of integral type.
5661
5662 @item m
5663 represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
5664 same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
5665 be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}).
5666
5667 @item n
5668 represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
5669
5670 @item r
5671 represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
5672
5673 @item t
5674 represents a type.
5675
5676 @item v
5677 represents a variable.
5678
5679 @item x
5680 represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
5681 explanation of the function for details.
5682 @end table
5683
5684 All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
5685
5686 @table @code
5687 @item ABS(@var{n})
5688 Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
5689
5690 @item CAP(@var{c})
5691 If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
5692 equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument
5693
5694 @item CHR(@var{i})
5695 Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5696
5697 @item DEC(@var{v})
5698 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5699
5700 @item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
5701 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5702 new value.
5703
5704 @item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5705 Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
5706 set.
5707
5708 @item FLOAT(@var{i})
5709 Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
5710
5711 @item HIGH(@var{a})
5712 Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
5713
5714 @item INC(@var{v})
5715 Increments the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5716
5717 @item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
5718 Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5719 new value.
5720
5721 @item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5722 Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
5723 there. Returns the new set.
5724
5725 @item MAX(@var{t})
5726 Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
5727
5728 @item MIN(@var{t})
5729 Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
5730
5731 @item ODD(@var{i})
5732 Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
5733
5734 @item ORD(@var{x})
5735 Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
5736 value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines supporting the
5737 ASCII character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
5738 integral, character and enumerated types.
5739
5740 @item SIZE(@var{x})
5741 Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
5742
5743 @item TRUNC(@var{r})
5744 Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
5745
5746 @item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
5747 Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5748 @end table
5749
5750 @quotation
5751 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
5752 @value{GDBN} will treat the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
5753 an error.
5754 @end quotation
5755
5756 @cindex Modula-2 constants
5757 @node M2 Constants
5758 @subsubsection Constants
5759
5760 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
5761 ways:
5762
5763 @itemize @bullet
5764
5765 @item
5766 Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
5767 expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
5768 rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
5769 trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
5770
5771 @item
5772 Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
5773 decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
5774 then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
5775 @samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
5776 digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
5777 digits.
5778
5779 @item
5780 Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
5781 like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
5782 also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value, usually)
5783 followed by a @samp{C}.
5784
5785 @item
5786 String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
5787 pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
5788 Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
5789 Constants, ,C and C++ constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
5790 sequences.
5791
5792 @item
5793 Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
5794
5795 @item
5796 Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
5797 @code{FALSE}.
5798
5799 @item
5800 Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
5801
5802 @item
5803 Set constants are not yet supported.
5804 @end itemize
5805
5806 @node M2 Defaults
5807 @subsubsection Modula-2 defaults
5808 @cindex Modula-2 defaults
5809
5810 If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
5811 both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
5812 Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5813 selected the working language.
5814
5815 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
5816 code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} will set the
5817 working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
5818 the language automatically}, for further details.
5819
5820 @node Deviations
5821 @subsubsection Deviations from standard Modula-2
5822 @cindex Modula-2, deviations from
5823
5824 A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
5825 This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
5826
5827 @itemize @bullet
5828 @item
5829 Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
5830 integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
5831 debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
5832 pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
5833 through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
5834 returned a pointer.)
5835
5836 @item
5837 C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
5838 non-printable characters. @value{GDBN} will print out strings with these
5839 escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
5840 printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
5841
5842 @item
5843 The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
5844 argument.
5845
5846 @item
5847 All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
5848 @end itemize
5849
5850 @node M2 Checks
5851 @subsubsection Modula-2 type and range checks
5852 @cindex Modula-2 checks
5853
5854 @quotation
5855 @emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
5856 range checking.
5857 @end quotation
5858 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
5859
5860 @value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
5861
5862 @itemize @bullet
5863 @item
5864 They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
5865 @var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
5866
5867 @item
5868 They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
5869 GNU Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
5870 @end itemize
5871
5872 As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
5873 whose types are not equivalent is an error.
5874
5875 Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
5876 index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
5877
5878 @node M2 Scope
5879 @subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5880 @cindex scope
5881 @kindex .
5882 @cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
5883 @ifinfo
5884 @kindex colon-colon
5885 @c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
5886 @end ifinfo
5887 @iftex
5888 @kindex ::
5889 @end iftex
5890
5891 There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
5892 (@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
5893 similar syntax:
5894
5895 @example
5896
5897 @var{module} . @var{id}
5898 @var{scope} :: @var{id}
5899 @end example
5900
5901 @noindent
5902 where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
5903 @var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
5904 identifier within your program, except another module.
5905
5906 Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
5907 specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
5908 found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} will search all scopes
5909 enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
5910
5911 Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
5912 the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
5913 definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
5914 an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
5915 module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
5916 @var{module}.
5917
5918 @node GDB/M2
5919 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5920
5921 Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
5922 Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
5923 specifically to C and C++: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
5924 @samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
5925 apply to C++, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
5926 analogue in Modula-2.
5927
5928 The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
5929 while using any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
5930 intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
5931 created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C++. However, because an
5932 address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
5933 @samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful. (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions})
5934
5935 @cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
5936 In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
5937 interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
5938
5939 @end ifset
5940 @end ifclear
5941
5942 @node Symbols
5943 @chapter Examining the Symbol Table
5944
5945 The commands described in this section allow you to inquire about the
5946 symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
5947 program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
5948 does not change as your program executes. @value{GDBN} finds it in your
5949 program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
5950 (@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing files}), or by one of the
5951 file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
5952
5953 @c FIXME! This might be intentionally specific to C and C++; if so, move
5954 @c to someplace in C section of lang chapter.
5955 @cindex symbol names
5956 @cindex names of symbols
5957 @cindex quoting names
5958 Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
5959 characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
5960 most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
5961 source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program variables}). File names
5962 are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
5963 ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
5964 @samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
5965 @samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
5966
5967 @example
5968 p 'foo.c'::x
5969 @end example
5970
5971 @noindent
5972 looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
5973
5974 @table @code
5975 @item info address @var{symbol}
5976 @kindex info address
5977 Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
5978 variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
5979 local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
5980 is always stored.
5981
5982 Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
5983 at all for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints
5984 the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
5985
5986 @item whatis @var{exp}
5987 @kindex whatis
5988 Print the data type of expression @var{exp}. @var{exp} is not
5989 actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
5990 assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
5991 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
5992
5993 @item whatis
5994 Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
5995
5996 @item ptype @var{typename}
5997 @kindex ptype
5998 Print a description of data type @var{typename}. @var{typename} may be
5999 the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form
6000 @ifclear CONLY
6001 @samp{class @var{class-name}},
6002 @end ifclear
6003 @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union @var{union-tag}} or
6004 @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
6005
6006 @item ptype @var{exp}
6007 @itemx ptype
6008 Print a description of the type of expression @var{exp}. @code{ptype}
6009 differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
6010 of just the name of the type.
6011
6012 For example, for this variable declaration:
6013
6014 @example
6015 struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
6016 @end example
6017
6018 @noindent
6019 the two commands give this output:
6020
6021 @example
6022 @group
6023 (@value{GDBP}) whatis v
6024 type = struct complex
6025 (@value{GDBP}) ptype v
6026 type = struct complex @{
6027 double real;
6028 double imag;
6029 @}
6030 @end group
6031 @end example
6032
6033 @noindent
6034 As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
6035 the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
6036
6037 @item info types @var{regexp}
6038 @itemx info types
6039 @kindex info types
6040 Print a brief description of all types whose name matches @var{regexp}
6041 (or all types in your program, if you supply no argument). Each
6042 complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
6043 @samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
6044 name includes the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
6045 information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
6046
6047 This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
6048 @code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
6049 lists all source files where a type is defined.
6050
6051 @item info source
6052 @kindex info source
6053 Show the name of the current source file---that is, the source file for
6054 the function containing the current point of execution---and the language
6055 it was written in.
6056
6057 @item info sources
6058 @kindex info sources
6059 Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
6060 debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
6061 have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
6062
6063 @item info functions
6064 @kindex info functions
6065 Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
6066
6067 @item info functions @var{regexp}
6068 Print the names and data types of all defined functions
6069 whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
6070 Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
6071 include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
6072 start with @code{step}.
6073
6074 @item info variables
6075 @kindex info variables
6076 Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
6077 outside of functions (i.e., excluding local variables).
6078
6079 @item info variables @var{regexp}
6080 Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
6081 variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
6082 @var{regexp}.
6083
6084 @ignore
6085 This was never implemented.
6086 @item info methods
6087 @itemx info methods @var{regexp}
6088 @kindex info methods
6089 The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
6090 methods within C++ program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
6091 specific set of methods found in the various C++ classes. Many
6092 C++ classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
6093 from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use. The
6094 @code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
6095 which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
6096 @end ignore
6097
6098 @item maint print symbols @var{filename}
6099 @itemx maint print psymbols @var{filename}
6100 @itemx maint print msymbols @var{filename}
6101 @kindex maint print symbols
6102 @cindex symbol dump
6103 @kindex maint print psymbols
6104 @cindex partial symbol dump
6105 Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file @var{filename}.
6106 These commands are used to debug the @value{GDBN} symbol-reading code. Only
6107 symbols with debugging data are included. If you use @samp{maint print
6108 symbols}, @value{GDBN} includes all the symbols for which it has already
6109 collected full details: that is, @var{filename} reflects symbols for
6110 only those files whose symbols @value{GDBN} has read. You can use the
6111 command @code{info sources} to find out which files these are. If you
6112 use @samp{maint print psymbols} instead, the dump shows information about
6113 symbols that @value{GDBN} only knows partially---that is, symbols defined in
6114 files that @value{GDBN} has skimmed, but not yet read completely. Finally,
6115 @samp{maint print msymbols} dumps just the minimal symbol information
6116 required for each object file from which @value{GDBN} has read some symbols.
6117 @xref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}, for a discussion of how
6118 @value{GDBN} reads symbols (in the description of @code{symbol-file}).
6119 @end table
6120
6121 @node Altering
6122 @chapter Altering Execution
6123
6124 Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want to
6125 find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would lead to
6126 correct results in the rest of the run. You can find the answer by
6127 experiment, using the @value{GDBN} features for altering execution of the
6128 program.
6129
6130 For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
6131 locations,
6132 @ifclear BARETARGET
6133 give your program a signal, restart it
6134 @end ifclear
6135 @ifset BARETARGET
6136 restart your program
6137 @end ifset
6138 at a different address, or even return prematurely from a function to
6139 its caller.
6140
6141 @menu
6142 * Assignment:: Assignment to variables
6143 * Jumping:: Continuing at a different address
6144 @ifclear BARETARGET
6145 * Signaling:: Giving your program a signal
6146 @end ifclear
6147
6148 * Returning:: Returning from a function
6149 * Calling:: Calling your program's functions
6150 * Patching:: Patching your program
6151 @end menu
6152
6153 @node Assignment
6154 @section Assignment to variables
6155
6156 @cindex assignment
6157 @cindex setting variables
6158 To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
6159 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}. For example,
6160
6161 @example
6162 print x=4
6163 @end example
6164
6165 @noindent
6166 stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
6167 value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
6168 @ifclear CONLY
6169 @xref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages}, for more
6170 information on operators in supported languages.
6171 @end ifclear
6172
6173 @kindex set variable
6174 @cindex variables, setting
6175 If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use the
6176 @code{set} command instead of the @code{print} command. @code{set} is
6177 really the same as @code{print} except that the expression's value is
6178 not printed and is not put in the value history (@pxref{Value History,
6179 ,Value history}). The expression is evaluated only for its effects.
6180
6181 If the beginning of the argument string of the @code{set} command
6182 appears identical to a @code{set} subcommand, use the @code{set
6183 variable} command instead of just @code{set}. This command is identical
6184 to @code{set} except for its lack of subcommands. For example, if
6185 your program has a variable @code{width}, you get
6186 an error if you try to set a new value with just @samp{set width=13},
6187 because @value{GDBN} has the command @code{set width}:
6188
6189 @example
6190 (@value{GDBP}) whatis width
6191 type = double
6192 (@value{GDBP}) p width
6193 $4 = 13
6194 (@value{GDBP}) set width=47
6195 Invalid syntax in expression.
6196 @end example
6197
6198 @noindent
6199 The invalid expression, of course, is @samp{=47}. In
6200 order to actually set the program's variable @code{width}, use
6201
6202 @example
6203 (@value{GDBP}) set var width=47
6204 @end example
6205
6206 @value{GDBN} allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
6207 freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
6208 and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
6209 same length or shorter.
6210 @comment FIXME: how do structs align/pad in these conversions?
6211 @comment /pesch@cygnus.com 18dec1990
6212
6213 To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the @samp{@{@dots{}@}}
6214 construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
6215 (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). For example, @code{@{int@}0x83040} refers
6216 to memory location @code{0x83040} as an integer (which implies a certain size
6217 and representation in memory), and
6218
6219 @example
6220 set @{int@}0x83040 = 4
6221 @end example
6222
6223 @noindent
6224 stores the value 4 into that memory location.
6225
6226 @node Jumping
6227 @section Continuing at a different address
6228
6229 Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
6230 it stopped, with the @code{continue} command. You can instead continue at
6231 an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
6232
6233 @table @code
6234 @item jump @var{linespec}
6235 @kindex jump
6236 Resume execution at line @var{linespec}. Execution will stop
6237 immediately if there is a breakpoint there. @xref{List, ,Printing
6238 source lines}, for a description of the different forms of
6239 @var{linespec}.
6240
6241 The @code{jump} command does not change the current stack frame, or
6242 the stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
6243 register other than the program counter. If line @var{linespec} is in
6244 a different function from the one currently executing, the results may
6245 be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of arguments or
6246 of local variables. For this reason, the @code{jump} command requests
6247 confirmation if the specified line is not in the function currently
6248 executing. However, even bizarre results are predictable if you are
6249 well acquainted with the machine-language code of your program.
6250
6251 @item jump *@var{address}
6252 Resume execution at the instruction at address @var{address}.
6253 @end table
6254
6255 You can get much the same effect as the @code{jump} command by storing a
6256 new value into the register @code{$pc}. The difference is that this
6257 does not start your program running; it only changes the address where it
6258 @emph{will} run when it is continued. For example,
6259
6260 @example
6261 set $pc = 0x485
6262 @end example
6263
6264 @noindent
6265 causes the next @code{continue} command or stepping command to execute at
6266 address @code{0x485}, rather than at the address where your program stopped.
6267 @xref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}.
6268
6269 The most common occasion to use the @code{jump} command is to back up,
6270 perhaps with more breakpoints set, over a portion of a program that has
6271 already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail.
6272
6273 @ifclear BARETARGET
6274 @c @group
6275 @node Signaling
6276 @section Giving your program a signal
6277
6278 @table @code
6279 @item signal @var{signal}
6280 @kindex signal
6281 Resume execution where your program stopped, but immediately give it the
6282 signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the name or the number of a
6283 signal. For example, on many systems @code{signal 2} and @code{signal
6284 SIGINT} are both ways of sending an interrupt signal.
6285
6286 Alternatively, if @var{signal} is zero, continue execution without
6287 giving a signal. This is useful when your program stopped on account of
6288 a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed with the
6289 @code{continue} command; @samp{signal 0} causes it to resume without a
6290 signal.
6291
6292 @code{signal} does not repeat when you press @key{RET} a second time
6293 after executing the command.
6294 @end table
6295 @c @end group
6296
6297 Invoking the @code{signal} command is not the same as invoking the
6298 @code{kill} utility from the shell. Sending a signal with @code{kill}
6299 causes @value{GDBN} to decide what to do with the signal depending on
6300 the signal handling tables (@pxref{Signals}). The @code{signal} command
6301 passes the signal directly to your program.
6302
6303 @end ifclear
6304
6305 @node Returning
6306 @section Returning from a function
6307
6308 @table @code
6309 @item return
6310 @itemx return @var{expression}
6311 @cindex returning from a function
6312 @kindex return
6313 You can cancel execution of a function call with the @code{return}
6314 command. If you give an
6315 @var{expression} argument, its value is used as the function's return
6316 value.
6317 @end table
6318
6319 When you use @code{return}, @value{GDBN} discards the selected stack frame
6320 (and all frames within it). You can think of this as making the
6321 discarded frame return prematurely. If you wish to specify a value to
6322 be returned, give that value as the argument to @code{return}.
6323
6324 This pops the selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a
6325 frame}), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as the
6326 innermost remaining frame. That frame becomes selected. The
6327 specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values
6328 of functions.
6329
6330 The @code{return} command does not resume execution; it leaves the
6331 program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
6332 returned. In contrast, the @code{finish} command (@pxref{Continuing
6333 and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}) resumes execution until the
6334 selected stack frame returns naturally.
6335
6336 @node Calling
6337 @section Calling program functions
6338
6339 @cindex calling functions
6340 @kindex call
6341 @table @code
6342 @item call @var{expr}
6343 Evaluate the expression @var{expr} without displaying @code{void}
6344 returned values.
6345 @end table
6346
6347 You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
6348 execute a function from your program, but without cluttering the output
6349 with @code{void} returned values. The result is printed and saved in
6350 the value history, if it is not void.
6351
6352 @node Patching
6353 @section Patching programs
6354 @cindex patching binaries
6355 @cindex writing into executables
6356 @ifclear BARETARGET
6357 @cindex writing into corefiles
6358 @end ifclear
6359
6360 By default, @value{GDBN} opens the file containing your program's executable
6361 code
6362 @ifclear BARETARGET
6363 (or the corefile)
6364 @end ifclear
6365 read-only. This prevents accidental alterations
6366 to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally patching
6367 your program's binary.
6368
6369 If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
6370 explicitly with the @code{set write} command. For example, you might
6371 want to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency
6372 repairs.
6373
6374 @table @code
6375 @item set write on
6376 @itemx set write off
6377 @kindex set write
6378 If you specify @samp{set write on}, @value{GDBN} will open executable
6379 @ifclear BARETARGET
6380 and core
6381 @end ifclear
6382 files for both reading and writing; if you specify @samp{set write
6383 off} (the default), @value{GDBN} will open them read-only.
6384
6385 If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using the
6386 @code{exec-file}
6387 @ifclear BARETARGET
6388 or @code{core-file}
6389 @end ifclear
6390 command) after changing @code{set write}, for your new setting to take
6391 effect.
6392
6393 @item show write
6394 @kindex show write
6395 Display whether executable files
6396 @ifclear BARETARGET
6397 and core files
6398 @end ifclear
6399 will be opened for writing as well as reading.
6400 @end table
6401
6402 @node GDB Files
6403 @chapter @value{GDBN} Files
6404
6405 @value{GDBN} needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged, both in
6406 order to read its symbol table and in order to start your program.
6407 @ifclear BARETARGET
6408 To debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell @value{GDBN}
6409 the name of the core dump file.
6410 @end ifclear
6411
6412 @menu
6413 * Files:: Commands to specify files
6414 * Symbol Errors:: Errors reading symbol files
6415 @end menu
6416
6417 @node Files
6418 @section Commands to specify files
6419 @cindex symbol table
6420
6421 @ifclear BARETARGET
6422 @cindex core dump file
6423 The usual way to specify executable and core dump file names is with
6424 the command arguments given when you start @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation,
6425 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6426 @end ifclear
6427 @ifset BARETARGET
6428 The usual way to specify an executable file name is with
6429 the command argument given when you start @value{GDBN}, (@pxref{Invocation,
6430 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6431 @end ifset
6432
6433 Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
6434 @value{GDBN} session. Or you may run @value{GDBN} and forget to specify
6435 a file you want to use. In these situations the @value{GDBN} commands
6436 to specify new files are useful.
6437
6438 @table @code
6439 @item file @var{filename}
6440 @cindex executable file
6441 @kindex file
6442 Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
6443 symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the program
6444 executed when you use the @code{run} command. If you do not specify a
6445 directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory, @value{GDBN}
6446 uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of directories to
6447 search, just as the shell does when looking for a program to run. You
6448 can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN} and your program,
6449 using the @code{path} command.
6450
6451 On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary symbol table file
6452 @file{@var{filename}.syms} may be available for @var{filename}. If it
6453 is, @value{GDBN} will map in the symbol table from
6454 @file{@var{filename}.syms}, starting up more quickly. See the
6455 descriptions of the options @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} (available
6456 on the command line, and with the commands @code{file}, @code{symbol-file},
6457 or @code{add-symbol-file}), for more information.
6458
6459 @item file
6460 @code{file} with no argument makes @value{GDBN} discard any information it
6461 has on both executable file and the symbol table.
6462
6463 @item exec-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6464 @kindex exec-file
6465 Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is found
6466 in @var{filename}. @value{GDBN} will search the environment variable @code{PATH}
6467 if necessary to locate your program. Omitting @var{filename} means to
6468 discard information on the executable file.
6469
6470 @item symbol-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6471 @kindex symbol-file
6472 Read symbol table information from file @var{filename}. @code{PATH} is
6473 searched when necessary. Use the @code{file} command to get both symbol
6474 table and program to run from the same file.
6475
6476 @code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out @value{GDBN} information on your
6477 program's symbol table.
6478
6479 The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents of its
6480 convenience variables, the value history, and all breakpoints and
6481 auto-display expressions. This is because they may contain pointers to
6482 the internal data recording symbols and data types, which are part of
6483 the old symbol table data being discarded inside @value{GDBN}.
6484
6485 @code{symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
6486 executing it once.
6487
6488 When @value{GDBN} is configured for a particular environment, it will
6489 understand debugging information in whatever format is the standard
6490 generated for that environment; you may use either a GNU compiler, or
6491 other compilers that adhere to the local conventions. Best results are
6492 usually obtained from GNU compilers; for example, using @code{@value{GCC}}
6493 you can generate debugging information for optimized code.
6494
6495 On some kinds of object files, the @code{symbol-file} command does not
6496 normally read the symbol table in full right away. Instead, it scans
6497 the symbol table quickly to find which source files and which symbols
6498 are present. The details are read later, one source file at a time,
6499 as they are needed.
6500
6501 The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make @value{GDBN} start up
6502 faster. For the most part, it is invisible except for occasional
6503 pauses while the symbol table details for a particular source file are
6504 being read. (The @code{set verbose} command can turn these pauses
6505 into messages if desired. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings
6506 and messages}.)
6507
6508 We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet. When the
6509 symbol table is stored in COFF format, @code{symbol-file} reads the
6510 symbol table data in full right away.
6511
6512 @item symbol-file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6513 @itemx file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6514 @kindex readnow
6515 @cindex reading symbols immediately
6516 @cindex symbols, reading immediately
6517 @kindex mapped
6518 @cindex memory-mapped symbol file
6519 @cindex saving symbol table
6520 You can override the @value{GDBN} two-stage strategy for reading symbol
6521 tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
6522 load symbol table information, if you want to be sure @value{GDBN} has the
6523 entire symbol table available.
6524
6525 @ifclear BARETARGET
6526 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the
6527 @code{mmap} system call, you can use another option, @samp{-mapped}, to
6528 cause @value{GDBN} to write the symbols for your program into a reusable
6529 file. Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions will map in symbol information
6530 from this auxiliary symbol file (if the program has not changed), rather
6531 than spending time reading the symbol table from the executable
6532 program. Using the @samp{-mapped} option has the same effect as
6533 starting @value{GDBN} with the @samp{-mapped} command-line option.
6534
6535 You can use both options together, to make sure the auxiliary symbol
6536 file has all the symbol information for your program.
6537
6538 The auxiliary symbol file for a program called @var{myprog} is called
6539 @samp{@var{myprog}.syms}. Once this file exists (so long as it is newer
6540 than the corresponding executable), @value{GDBN} will always attempt to use
6541 it when you debug @var{myprog}; no special options or commands are
6542 needed.
6543
6544 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where you run
6545 @value{GDBN}. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN}
6546 symbol table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
6547
6548 @c FIXME: for now no mention of directories, since this seems to be in
6549 @c flux. 13mar1992 status is that in theory GDB would look either in
6550 @c current dir or in same dir as myprog; but issues like competing
6551 @c GDB's, or clutter in system dirs, mean that in practice right now
6552 @c only current dir is used. FFish says maybe a special GDB hierarchy
6553 @c (eg rooted in val of env var GDBSYMS) could exist for mappable symbol
6554 @c files.
6555
6556 @item core-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6557 @kindex core
6558 @kindex core-file
6559 Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the ``contents
6560 of memory''. Traditionally, core files contain only some parts of the
6561 address space of the process that generated them; @value{GDBN} can access the
6562 executable file itself for other parts.
6563
6564 @code{core-file} with no argument specifies that no core file is
6565 to be used.
6566
6567 Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually running
6568 under @value{GDBN}. So, if you have been running your program and you wish to
6569 debug a core file instead, you must kill the subprocess in which the
6570 program is running. To do this, use the @code{kill} command
6571 (@pxref{Kill Process, ,Killing the child process}).
6572 @end ifclear
6573
6574 @item load @var{filename}
6575 @kindex load
6576 @ifset GENERIC
6577 Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
6578 @value{GDBN}, the @code{load} command may be available. Where it exists, it
6579 is meant to make @var{filename} (an executable) available for debugging
6580 on the remote system---by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
6581 @code{load} also records the @var{filename} symbol table in @value{GDBN}, like
6582 the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
6583
6584 If your @value{GDBN} does not have a @code{load} command, attempting to
6585 execute it gets the error message ``@code{You can't do that when your
6586 target is @dots{}}''
6587 @end ifset
6588
6589 The file is loaded at whatever address is specified in the executable.
6590 For some object file formats, like a.out, the object file format fixes
6591 the address and so it won't necessarily match the address you gave to
6592 the linker.
6593
6594 @ifset VXWORKS
6595 On VxWorks, @code{load} will dynamically link @var{filename} on the
6596 current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
6597 @end ifset
6598
6599 @ifset I960
6600 @cindex download to Nindy-960
6601 With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load} will
6602 download @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
6603 @value{GDBN}.
6604 @end ifset
6605
6606 @ifset H8
6607 @cindex download to H8/300 or H8/500
6608 @cindex H8/300 or H8/500 download
6609 @cindex download to Hitachi SH
6610 @cindex Hitachi SH download
6611 When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board
6612 (@pxref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}),
6613 the @code{load} command downloads your program to the Hitachi board and also
6614 opens it as the current executable target for @value{GDBN} on your host
6615 (like the @code{file} command).
6616 @end ifset
6617
6618 @code{load} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
6619
6620 @ifclear BARETARGET
6621 @item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
6622 @itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6623 @kindex add-symbol-file
6624 @cindex dynamic linking
6625 The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table information
6626 from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command when @var{filename}
6627 has been dynamically loaded (by some other means) into the program that
6628 is running. @var{address} should be the memory address at which the
6629 file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure this out for itself.
6630 You can specify @var{address} as an expression.
6631
6632 The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
6633 originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command. You can use the
6634 @code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data thus
6635 read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data instead,
6636 use the @code{symbol-file} command.
6637
6638 @code{add-symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
6639
6640 You can use the @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} options just as with
6641 the @code{symbol-file} command, to change how @value{GDBN} manages the symbol
6642 table information for @var{filename}.
6643 @end ifclear
6644
6645 @item info files
6646 @itemx info target
6647 @kindex info files
6648 @kindex info target
6649 @code{info files} and @code{info target} are synonymous; both print
6650 the current target (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}),
6651 including the
6652 @ifclear BARETARGET
6653 names of the executable and core dump files
6654 @end ifclear
6655 @ifset BARETARGET
6656 name of the executable file
6657 @end ifset
6658 currently in use by @value{GDBN}, and the files from which symbols were
6659 loaded. The command @code{help targets} lists all possible targets
6660 rather than current ones.
6661 @end table
6662
6663 All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
6664 as arguments. @value{GDBN} always converts the file name to an absolute path
6665 name and remembers it that way.
6666
6667 @ifclear BARETARGET
6668 @cindex shared libraries
6669 @value{GDBN} supports SunOS, SVR4, and IBM RS/6000 shared libraries.
6670 @value{GDBN} automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
6671 when you use the @code{run} command, or when you examine a core file.
6672 (Before you issue the @code{run} command, @value{GDBN} will not understand
6673 references to a function in a shared library, however---unless you are
6674 debugging a core file).
6675 @c FIXME: next @value{GDBN} release should permit some refs to undef
6676 @c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared lib
6677
6678 @table @code
6679 @item info share
6680 @itemx info sharedlibrary
6681 @kindex info sharedlibrary
6682 @kindex info share
6683 Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.
6684
6685 @item sharedlibrary @var{regex}
6686 @itemx share @var{regex}
6687 @kindex sharedlibrary
6688 @kindex share
6689 This is an obsolescent command; you can use it to explicitly load shared
6690 object library symbols for files matching a Unix regular expression, but
6691 as with files loaded automatically, it will only load shared libraries
6692 required by your program for a core file or after typing @code{run}. If
6693 @var{regex} is omitted all shared libraries required by your program are
6694 loaded.
6695 @end table
6696 @end ifclear
6697
6698 @node Symbol Errors
6699 @section Errors reading symbol files
6700
6701 While reading a symbol file, @value{GDBN} will occasionally encounter problems,
6702 such as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
6703 output. By default, @value{GDBN} does not notify you of such problems, since
6704 they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
6705 debugging compilers. If you are interested in seeing information
6706 about ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask @value{GDBN} to print
6707 only one message about each such type of problem, no matter how many
6708 times the problem occurs; or you can ask @value{GDBN} to print more messages,
6709 to see how many times the problems occur, with the @code{set
6710 complaints} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
6711 messages}).
6712
6713 The messages currently printed, and their meanings, include:
6714
6715 @table @code
6716 @item inner block not inside outer block in @var{symbol}
6717
6718 The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
6719 (such as at the start of a function or a block of statements). This
6720 error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully contained
6721 in its outer scope blocks.
6722
6723 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it had
6724 the same scope as the outer block. In the error message, @var{symbol}
6725 may be shown as ``@code{(don't know)}'' if the outer block is not a
6726 function.
6727
6728 @item block at @var{address} out of order
6729
6730 The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
6731 order of increasing addresses. This error indicates that it does not
6732 do so.
6733
6734 @value{GDBN} does not circumvent this problem, and will have trouble
6735 locating symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading. (You
6736 can often determine what source file is affected by specifying
6737 @code{set verbose on}. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
6738 messages}.)
6739
6740 @item bad block start address patched
6741
6742 The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
6743 smaller than the address of the preceding source line. This is known
6744 to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
6745
6746 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
6747 starting on the previous source line.
6748
6749 @item bad string table offset in symbol @var{n}
6750
6751 @cindex foo
6752 Symbol number @var{n} contains a pointer into the string table which is
6753 larger than the size of the string table.
6754
6755 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
6756 name @code{foo}, which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
6757 with this name.
6758
6759 @item unknown symbol type @code{0x@var{nn}}
6760
6761 The symbol information contains new data types that @value{GDBN} does not yet
6762 know how to read. @code{0x@var{nn}} is the symbol type of the misunderstood
6763 information, in hexadecimal.
6764
6765 @value{GDBN} circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information. This
6766 will usually allow your program to be debugged, though certain symbols
6767 will not be accessible. If you encounter such a problem and feel like
6768 debugging it, you can debug @code{@value{GDBP}} with itself, breakpoint on
6769 @code{complain}, then go up to the function @code{read_dbx_symtab} and
6770 examine @code{*bufp} to see the symbol.
6771
6772 @item stub type has NULL name
6773 @value{GDBN} could not find the full definition for
6774 @ifclear CONLY
6775 a struct or class.
6776 @end ifclear
6777 @ifset CONLY
6778 a struct.
6779 @end ifset
6780
6781 @ifclear CONLY
6782 @item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
6783
6784 The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
6785 information that recent versions of the compiler should have output
6786 for it.
6787 @end ifclear
6788
6789 @item info mismatch between compiler and debugger
6790
6791 @value{GDBN} could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
6792 @end table
6793
6794 @node Targets
6795 @chapter Specifying a Debugging Target
6796 @cindex debugging target
6797 @kindex target
6798
6799 A @dfn{target} is the execution environment occupied by your program.
6800 @ifclear BARETARGET
6801 Often, @value{GDBN} runs in the same host environment as your program; in
6802 that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when you
6803 use the @code{file} or @code{core} commands. When you need more
6804 flexibility---for example, running @value{GDBN} on a physically separate
6805 host, or controlling a standalone system over a serial port or a
6806 realtime system over a TCP/IP connection---you
6807 @end ifclear
6808 @ifset BARETARGET
6809 You
6810 @end ifset
6811 can use the @code{target} command to specify one of the target types
6812 configured for @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing
6813 targets}).
6814
6815 @menu
6816 * Active Targets:: Active targets
6817 * Target Commands:: Commands for managing targets
6818 * Remote:: Remote debugging
6819 @end menu
6820
6821 @node Active Targets
6822 @section Active targets
6823 @cindex stacking targets
6824 @cindex active targets
6825 @cindex multiple targets
6826
6827 @ifclear BARETARGET
6828 There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
6829 executable files. @value{GDBN} can work concurrently on up to three active
6830 targets, one in each class. This allows you to (for example) start a
6831 process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on a core
6832 file.
6833
6834 For example, if you execute @samp{gdb a.out}, then the executable file
6835 @code{a.out} is the only active target. If you designate a core file as
6836 well---presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped---then
6837 @value{GDBN} has two active targets and will use them in tandem, looking
6838 first in the corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy
6839 requests for memory addresses. (Typically, these two classes of target
6840 are complementary, since core files contain only a program's
6841 read-write memory---variables and so on---plus machine status, while
6842 executable files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
6843 @end ifclear
6844
6845 When you type @code{run}, your executable file becomes an active process
6846 target as well. When a process target is active, all @value{GDBN} commands
6847 requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in an
6848 @ifclear BARETARGET
6849 active core file or
6850 @end ifclear
6851 executable file target are obscured while the process
6852 target is active.
6853
6854 @ifset BARETARGET
6855 Use the @code{exec-file} command to select a
6856 new executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
6857 files}).
6858 @end ifset
6859 @ifclear BARETARGET
6860 Use the @code{core-file} and @code{exec-file} commands to select a
6861 new core file or executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
6862 files}). To specify as a target a process that is already running, use
6863 the @code{attach} command (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an
6864 already-running process}).
6865 @end ifclear
6866
6867 @node Target Commands
6868 @section Commands for managing targets
6869
6870 @table @code
6871 @item target @var{type} @var{parameters}
6872 Connects the @value{GDBN} host environment to a target
6873 @ifset BARETARGET
6874 machine.
6875 @end ifset
6876 @ifclear BARETARGET
6877 machine or process. A target is typically a protocol for talking to
6878 debugging facilities. You use the argument @var{type} to specify the
6879 type or protocol of the target machine.
6880
6881 Further @var{parameters} are interpreted by the target protocol, but
6882 typically include things like device names or host names to connect
6883 with, process numbers, and baud rates.
6884 @end ifclear
6885
6886 The @code{target} command will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again
6887 after executing the command.
6888
6889 @item help target
6890 @kindex help target
6891 Displays the names of all targets available. To display targets
6892 currently selected, use either @code{info target} or @code{info files}
6893 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
6894
6895 @item help target @var{name}
6896 Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
6897 select it.
6898 @end table
6899
6900 Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
6901 configuration):
6902
6903 @table @code
6904 @item target exec @var{program}
6905 @kindex target exec
6906 An executable file. @samp{target exec @var{program}} is the same as
6907 @samp{exec-file @var{program}}.
6908
6909 @ifclear BARETARGET
6910 @item target core @var{filename}
6911 @kindex target core
6912 A core dump file. @samp{target core @var{filename}} is the same as
6913 @samp{core-file @var{filename}}.
6914 @end ifclear
6915
6916 @ifset REMOTESTUB
6917 @item target remote @var{dev}
6918 @kindex target remote
6919 Remote serial target in GDB-specific protocol. The argument @var{dev}
6920 specifies what serial device to use for the connection (e.g.
6921 @file{/dev/ttya}). @xref{Remote, ,Remote debugging}.
6922 @end ifset
6923
6924 @ifset SIMS
6925 @item target sim
6926 @kindex target sim
6927 CPU simulator. @xref{Simulator,,Simulated CPU Target}.
6928 @end ifset
6929
6930 @ifset AMD29K
6931 @item target udi @var{keyword}
6932 @kindex target udi
6933 Remote AMD29K target, using the AMD UDI protocol. The @var{keyword}
6934 argument specifies which 29K board or simulator to use. @xref{UDI29K
6935 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K}.
6936
6937 @item target amd-eb @var{dev} @var{speed} @var{PROG}
6938 @kindex target amd-eb
6939 @cindex AMD EB29K
6940 Remote PC-resident AMD EB29K board, attached over serial lines.
6941 @var{dev} is the serial device, as for @code{target remote};
6942 @var{speed} allows you to specify the linespeed; and @var{PROG} is the
6943 name of the program to be debugged, as it appears to DOS on the PC.
6944 @xref{EB29K Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K}.
6945
6946 @end ifset
6947 @ifset H8
6948 @item target hms
6949 @kindex target hms
6950 A Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to your host.
6951 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
6952 @c Unix only, not currently of interest for H8-only manual
6953 Use special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
6954 line and the communications speed used.
6955 @end ifclear
6956 @xref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
6957
6958 @end ifset
6959 @ifset I960
6960 @item target nindy @var{devicename}
6961 @kindex target nindy
6962 An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
6963 the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
6964 @file{/dev/ttya}. @xref{i960-Nindy Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)}.
6965
6966 @end ifset
6967 @ifset ST2000
6968 @item target st2000 @var{dev} @var{speed}
6969 @kindex target st2000
6970 A Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's STDBUG protocol. @var{dev}
6971 is the name of the device attached to the ST2000 serial line;
6972 @var{speed} is the communication line speed. The arguments are not used
6973 if @value{GDBN} is configured to connect to the ST2000 using TCP or Telnet.
6974 @xref{ST2000 Remote,,@value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000}.
6975
6976 @end ifset
6977 @ifset VXWORKS
6978 @item target vxworks @var{machinename}
6979 @kindex target vxworks
6980 A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
6981 is the target system's machine name or IP address.
6982 @xref{VxWorks Remote, ,@value{GDBN} and VxWorks}.
6983 @end ifset
6984 @end table
6985
6986 @ifset GENERIC
6987 Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN}; your
6988 configuration may have more or fewer targets.
6989 @end ifset
6990
6991 @node Remote
6992 @section Remote debugging
6993 @cindex remote debugging
6994
6995 If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
6996 GDB in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging. For
6997 example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel, or on
6998 a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
6999 powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
7000
7001 Some configurations of GDB have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
7002 to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition,
7003 GDB comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to GDB, but
7004 not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
7005 write the remote stubs---the code that will run on the remote system to
7006 communicate with GDB.
7007
7008 Other remote targets may be available in your
7009 configuration of GDB; use @code{help targets} to list them.
7010
7011 @ifset GENERIC
7012 @c Text on starting up GDB in various specific cases; it goes up front
7013 @c in manuals configured for any of those particular situations, here
7014 @c otherwise.
7015 @menu
7016 @ifset REMOTESTUB
7017 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
7018 @end ifset
7019 @ifset I960
7020 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
7021 @end ifset
7022 @ifset AMD29K
7023 * UDI29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K
7024 * EB29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K
7025 @end ifset
7026 @ifset VXWORKS
7027 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
7028 @end ifset
7029 @ifset ST2000
7030 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
7031 @end ifset
7032 @ifset H8
7033 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
7034 @end ifset
7035 @ifset MIPS
7036 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
7037 @end ifset
7038 @ifset SIMS
7039 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
7040 @end ifset
7041 @end menu
7042
7043 @include remote.texi
7044 @end ifset
7045
7046 @node Controlling GDB
7047 @chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
7048
7049 You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using
7050 the @code{set} command. For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
7051 data, @pxref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}; other settings are described here.
7052
7053 @menu
7054 * Prompt:: Prompt
7055 * Editing:: Command editing
7056 * History:: Command history
7057 * Screen Size:: Screen size
7058 * Numbers:: Numbers
7059 * Messages/Warnings:: Optional warnings and messages
7060 @end menu
7061
7062 @node Prompt
7063 @section Prompt
7064 @cindex prompt
7065
7066 @value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
7067 called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. You
7068 can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
7069 instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
7070 the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell which
7071 one you are talking to.
7072
7073 @table @code
7074 @item set prompt @var{newprompt}
7075 @kindex set prompt
7076 Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
7077 @kindex show prompt
7078 @item show prompt
7079 Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
7080 @end table
7081
7082 @node Editing
7083 @section Command editing
7084 @cindex readline
7085 @cindex command line editing
7086
7087 @value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface. This
7088 GNU library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
7089 command line interface to the user. Advantages are @code{emacs}-style
7090 or @code{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
7091 substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
7092 debugging sessions.
7093
7094 You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
7095 command @code{set}.
7096
7097 @table @code
7098 @kindex set editing
7099 @cindex editing
7100 @item set editing
7101 @itemx set editing on
7102 Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
7103
7104 @item set editing off
7105 Disable command line editing.
7106
7107 @kindex show editing
7108 @item show editing
7109 Show whether command line editing is enabled.
7110 @end table
7111
7112 @node History
7113 @section Command history
7114
7115 @value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
7116 debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
7117 happened. Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
7118 history facility.
7119
7120 @table @code
7121 @cindex history substitution
7122 @cindex history file
7123 @kindex set history filename
7124 @item set history filename @var{fname}
7125 Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}. This is
7126 the file from which @value{GDBN} will read an initial command history
7127 list or to which it will write this list when it exits. This list is
7128 accessed through history expansion or through the history
7129 command editing characters listed below. This file defaults to the
7130 value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
7131 @file{./.gdb_history} if this variable is not set.
7132
7133 @cindex history save
7134 @kindex set history save
7135 @item set history save
7136 @itemx set history save on
7137 Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
7138 @code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
7139
7140 @item set history save off
7141 Stop recording command history in a file.
7142
7143 @cindex history size
7144 @kindex set history size
7145 @item set history size @var{size}
7146 Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} will keep in its history list.
7147 This defaults to the value of the environment variable
7148 @code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
7149 @end table
7150
7151 @cindex history expansion
7152 History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
7153 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7154 @xref{Event Designators}.
7155 @end ifset
7156
7157 Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
7158 is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
7159 @code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
7160 follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
7161 a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
7162 history facilities will not attempt substitution on the strings
7163 @kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
7164
7165 The commands to control history expansion are:
7166
7167 @table @code
7168
7169 @kindex set history expansion
7170 @item set history expansion on
7171 @itemx set history expansion
7172 Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
7173
7174 @item set history expansion off
7175 Disable history expansion.
7176
7177 The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
7178 editing and history expansion features. Users unfamiliar with @code{emacs}
7179 or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
7180 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7181 @xref{Command Line Editing}.
7182 @end ifset
7183
7184 @c @group
7185 @kindex show history
7186 @item show history
7187 @itemx show history filename
7188 @itemx show history save
7189 @itemx show history size
7190 @itemx show history expansion
7191 These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
7192 @code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
7193 @c @end group
7194 @end table
7195
7196 @table @code
7197 @kindex show commands
7198 @item show commands
7199 Display the last ten commands in the command history.
7200
7201 @item show commands @var{n}
7202 Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
7203
7204 @item show commands +
7205 Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
7206 @end table
7207
7208 @node Screen Size
7209 @section Screen size
7210 @cindex size of screen
7211 @cindex pauses in output
7212
7213 Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
7214 information output to the screen. To help you read all of it,
7215 @value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
7216 output. Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
7217 to discard the remaining output. Also, the screen width setting
7218 determines when to wrap lines of output. Depending on what is being
7219 printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
7220 rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
7221
7222 Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the termcap data base
7223 together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
7224 @code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
7225 you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
7226 width} commands:
7227
7228 @table @code
7229 @item set height @var{lpp}
7230 @itemx show height
7231 @itemx set width @var{cpl}
7232 @itemx show width
7233 @kindex set height
7234 @kindex set width
7235 @kindex show width
7236 @kindex show height
7237 These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
7238 a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
7239 commands display the current settings.
7240
7241 If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} will not pause during output
7242 no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a file
7243 or to an editor buffer.
7244
7245 Likewise, you can specify @samp{set width 0} to prevent @value{GDBN}
7246 from wrapping its output.
7247 @end table
7248
7249 @node Numbers
7250 @section Numbers
7251 @cindex number representation
7252 @cindex entering numbers
7253
7254 You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in @value{GDBN} by
7255 the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with @samp{0}, decimal
7256 numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers begin with @samp{0x}.
7257 Numbers that begin with none of these are, by default, entered in base
7258 10; likewise, the default display for numbers---when no particular
7259 format is specified---is base 10. You can change the default base for
7260 both input and output with the @code{set radix} command.
7261
7262 @table @code
7263 @kindex set radix
7264 @item set radix @var{base}
7265 Set the default base for numeric input and display. Supported choices
7266 for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
7267 specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
7268 example, any of
7269
7270 @example
7271 set radix 012
7272 set radix 10.
7273 set radix 0xa
7274 @end example
7275
7276 @noindent
7277 will set the base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
7278 will leave the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
7279
7280 @kindex show radix
7281 @item show radix
7282 Display the current default base for numeric input and display.
7283 @end table
7284
7285 @node Messages/Warnings
7286 @section Optional warnings and messages
7287
7288 By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings. If you are running
7289 on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose} command.
7290 It will make @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy internal operation, so
7291 you will not think it has crashed.
7292
7293 Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
7294 which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
7295 see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
7296
7297 @table @code
7298 @kindex set verbose
7299 @item set verbose on
7300 Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7301
7302 @item set verbose off
7303 Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7304
7305 @kindex show verbose
7306 @item show verbose
7307 Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
7308 @end table
7309
7310 By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an object
7311 file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may find
7312 this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors reading symbol files}).
7313
7314 @table @code
7315 @kindex set complaints
7316 @item set complaints @var{limit}
7317 Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of unusual
7318 symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set @var{limit} to
7319 zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number to prevent
7320 complaints from being suppressed.
7321
7322 @kindex show complaints
7323 @item show complaints
7324 Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
7325 @end table
7326
7327 By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
7328 lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
7329 you try to run a program which is already running:
7330
7331 @example
7332 (@value{GDBP}) run
7333 The program being debugged has been started already.
7334 Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
7335 @end example
7336
7337 If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
7338 commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
7339
7340 @table @code
7341 @kindex set confirm
7342 @cindex flinching
7343 @cindex confirmation
7344 @cindex stupid questions
7345 @item set confirm off
7346 Disables confirmation requests.
7347
7348 @item set confirm on
7349 Enables confirmation requests (the default).
7350
7351 @item show confirm
7352 @kindex show confirm
7353 Displays state of confirmation requests.
7354 @end table
7355
7356 @c FIXME this does not really belong here. But where *does* it belong?
7357 @cindex reloading symbols
7358 Some systems allow individual object files that make up your program to
7359 be replaced without stopping and restarting your program.
7360 @ifset VXWORKS
7361 For example, in VxWorks you can simply recompile a defective object file
7362 and keep on running.
7363 @end ifset
7364 If you are running on one of these systems, you can allow @value{GDBN} to
7365 reload the symbols for automatically relinked modules:
7366
7367 @table @code
7368 @kindex set symbol-reloading
7369 @item set symbol-reloading on
7370 Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file when an
7371 object file with a particular name is seen again.
7372
7373 @item set symbol-reloading off
7374 Do not replace symbol definitions when re-encountering object files of
7375 the same name. This is the default state; if you are not running on a
7376 system that permits automatically relinking modules, you should leave
7377 @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN} may discard symbols
7378 when linking large programs, that may contain several modules (from
7379 different directories or libraries) with the same name.
7380
7381 @item show symbol-reloading
7382 Show the current @code{on} or @code{off} setting.
7383 @end table
7384
7385 @node Sequences
7386 @chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
7387
7388 Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
7389 command lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of commands
7390 for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command files.
7391
7392 @menu
7393 * Define:: User-defined commands
7394 * Hooks:: User-defined command hooks
7395 * Command Files:: Command files
7396 * Output:: Commands for controlled output
7397 @end menu
7398
7399 @node Define
7400 @section User-defined commands
7401
7402 @cindex user-defined command
7403 A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to which you
7404 assign a new name as a command. This is done with the @code{define}
7405 command.
7406
7407 @table @code
7408 @item define @var{commandname}
7409 @kindex define
7410 Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
7411 by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
7412
7413 The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
7414 which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
7415 commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
7416
7417 @item document @var{commandname}
7418 @kindex document
7419 Give documentation to the user-defined command @var{commandname}. The
7420 command @var{commandname} must already be defined. This command reads
7421 lines of documentation just as @code{define} reads the lines of the
7422 command definition, ending with @code{end}. After the @code{document}
7423 command is finished, @code{help} on command @var{commandname} will print
7424 the documentation you have specified.
7425
7426 You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
7427 documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
7428 does not change the documentation.
7429
7430 @item help user-defined
7431 @kindex help user-defined
7432 List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
7433 (if any) for each.
7434
7435 @item show user
7436 @itemx show user @var{commandname}
7437 @kindex show user
7438 Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but not its
7439 documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
7440 definitions for all user-defined commands.
7441 @end table
7442
7443 User-defined commands do not take arguments. When they are executed, the
7444 commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
7445 stops execution of the user-defined command.
7446
7447 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7448 without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many @value{GDBN} commands
7449 that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7450 when used in a user-defined command.
7451
7452 @node Hooks
7453 @section User-defined command hooks
7454 @cindex command files
7455
7456 You may define @emph{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
7457 command. Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
7458 command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
7459 before that command.
7460
7461 In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists. Defining
7462 (@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
7463 execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
7464 displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
7465
7466 @ifclear BARETARGET
7467 For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
7468 single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
7469 you could define:
7470
7471 @example
7472 define hook-stop
7473 handle SIGALRM nopass
7474 end
7475
7476 define hook-run
7477 handle SIGALRM pass
7478 end
7479
7480 define hook-continue
7481 handle SIGLARM pass
7482 end
7483 @end example
7484 @end ifclear
7485
7486 You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
7487 not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
7488 name, e.g. @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
7489 @c FIXME! So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
7490 @c or not?
7491 If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
7492 @value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
7493 (before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
7494
7495 If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
7496 will get a warning from the @code{define} command.
7497
7498 @node Command Files
7499 @section Command files
7500
7501 @cindex command files
7502 A command file for @value{GDBN} is a file of lines that are @value{GDBN} commands. Comments
7503 (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included. An empty line in a
7504 command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat the last command, as
7505 it would from the terminal.
7506
7507 @cindex init file
7508 @cindex @file{@value{GDBINIT}}
7509 When you start @value{GDBN}, it automatically executes commands from its
7510 @dfn{init files}. These are files named @file{@value{GDBINIT}}.
7511 @value{GDBN} reads the init file (if any) in your home directory, then
7512 processes command line options and operands, and then reads the init
7513 file (if any) in the current working directory. This is so the init
7514 file in your home directory can set options (such as @code{set
7515 complaints}) which affect the processing of the command line options and
7516 operands. The init files are not executed if you use the @samp{-nx}
7517 option; @pxref{Mode Options, ,Choosing modes}.
7518
7519 @ifset GENERIC
7520 @cindex init file name
7521 On some configurations of @value{GDBN}, the init file is known by a
7522 different name (these are typically environments where a specialized
7523 form of GDB may need to coexist with other forms, hence a different name
7524 for the specialized version's init file). These are the environments
7525 with special init file names:
7526
7527 @itemize @bullet
7528 @kindex .vxgdbinit
7529 @item
7530 VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): @samp{.vxgdbinit}
7531
7532 @kindex .os68gdbinit
7533 @item
7534 OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): @samp{.os68gdbinit}
7535
7536 @kindex .esgdbinit
7537 @item
7538 ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): @samp{.esgdbinit}
7539 @end itemize
7540 @end ifset
7541
7542 You can also request the execution of a command file with the
7543 @code{source} command:
7544
7545 @table @code
7546 @item source @var{filename}
7547 @kindex source
7548 Execute the command file @var{filename}.
7549 @end table
7550
7551 The lines in a command file are executed sequentially. They are not
7552 printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates execution
7553 of the command file.
7554
7555 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7556 without asking when used in a command file. Many @value{GDBN} commands that
7557 normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7558 when called from command files.
7559
7560 @node Output
7561 @section Commands for controlled output
7562
7563 During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
7564 @value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
7565 explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
7566 describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
7567 want.
7568
7569 @table @code
7570 @item echo @var{text}
7571 @kindex echo
7572 @c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
7573 @c because it is not in ANSI.
7574 Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
7575 @var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
7576 newline. @strong{No newline will be printed unless you specify one.}
7577 In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
7578 by a space stands for a space. This is useful for displaying a
7579 string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
7580 trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
7581 To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
7582 @samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
7583
7584 A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
7585 the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
7586
7587 @example
7588 echo This is some text\n\
7589 which is continued\n\
7590 onto several lines.\n
7591 @end example
7592
7593 produces the same output as
7594
7595 @example
7596 echo This is some text\n
7597 echo which is continued\n
7598 echo onto several lines.\n
7599 @end example
7600
7601 @item output @var{expression}
7602 @kindex output
7603 Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
7604 newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
7605 value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on
7606 expressions.
7607
7608 @item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
7609 Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
7610 the same formats as for @code{print}. @xref{Output Formats,,Output
7611 formats}, for more information.
7612
7613 @item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
7614 @kindex printf
7615 Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
7616 @var{string}. The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may be
7617 either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as specified by
7618 @var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute the C
7619 subroutine
7620
7621 @example
7622 printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
7623 @end example
7624
7625 For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
7626
7627 @smallexample
7628 printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
7629 @end smallexample
7630
7631 The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
7632 string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
7633 letter.
7634 @end table
7635
7636 @ifclear DOSHOST
7637 @node Emacs
7638 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
7639
7640 @cindex emacs
7641 A special interface allows you to use GNU Emacs to view (and
7642 edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
7643 @value{GDBN}.
7644
7645 To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
7646 executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
7647 @value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
7648 created Emacs buffer.
7649
7650 Using @value{GDBN} under Emacs is just like using @value{GDBN} normally except for two
7651 things:
7652
7653 @itemize @bullet
7654 @item
7655 All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
7656 @end itemize
7657
7658 This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
7659 and output done by the program you are debugging.
7660
7661 This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
7662 commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
7663 in this way.
7664
7665 All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
7666 with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
7667 way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
7668 stop.
7669
7670 @itemize @bullet
7671 @item
7672 @value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
7673 @end itemize
7674
7675 Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
7676 source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
7677 left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
7678 source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
7679 and the source.
7680
7681 Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
7682 usual, but you probably will have no reason to use them.
7683
7684 @quotation
7685 @emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
7686 current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
7687 the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer will not
7688 appear to show your source. @value{GDBN} can find programs by searching your
7689 environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the @value{GDBN} input and output
7690 session will proceed normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
7691 back from @value{GDBN} to locate the source files in this situation. To
7692 avoid this problem, either start @value{GDBN} mode from the directory where
7693 your program resides, or specify a full path name when prompted for the
7694 @kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
7695
7696 A similar confusion can result if you use the @value{GDBN} @code{file} command to
7697 switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
7698 @value{GDBN} buffer in Emacs.
7699 @end quotation
7700
7701 By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If
7702 you need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you keep
7703 several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
7704 Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
7705
7706 @example
7707 (setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
7708 @end example
7709
7710 @noindent
7711 (preceded by @kbd{ESC ESC}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
7712 in your @file{.emacs} file) will make Emacs call the program named
7713 ``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
7714
7715 In the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
7716 addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
7717
7718 @table @kbd
7719 @item C-h m
7720 Describe the features of Emacs' @value{GDBN} Mode.
7721
7722 @item M-s
7723 Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
7724 update the display window to show the current file and location.
7725
7726 @item M-n
7727 Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
7728 calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command. Then update the display window
7729 to show the current file and location.
7730
7731 @item M-i
7732 Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
7733 display window accordingly.
7734
7735 @item M-x gdb-nexti
7736 Execute to next instruction, using the @value{GDBN} @code{nexti} command; update
7737 display window accordingly.
7738
7739 @item C-c C-f
7740 Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
7741 @code{finish} command.
7742
7743 @item M-c
7744 Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
7745 command.
7746
7747 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
7748
7749 @item M-u
7750 Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
7751 (@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}),
7752 like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
7753
7754 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
7755
7756 @item M-d
7757 Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
7758 @value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
7759
7760 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
7761
7762 @item C-x &
7763 Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
7764 of the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer. For example, if you wish to disassemble code
7765 around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
7766 then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
7767 argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
7768
7769 You can customize this further by defining elements of the list
7770 @code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
7771 otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
7772 inserted. A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} will both indicate that you
7773 wish special formatting, and act as an index to pick an element of the
7774 list. If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
7775 formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
7776 is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
7777 @end table
7778
7779 In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
7780 tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
7781
7782 If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
7783 it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
7784 request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this will recreate
7785 the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
7786 frame.
7787
7788 The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
7789 which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
7790 the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
7791 communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
7792 delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows will cease
7793 to correspond properly with the code.
7794
7795 @c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
7796 @c if/when v19 does something similar. ---pesch@cygnus.com 19dec1990
7797 @ignore
7798 @kindex emacs epoch environment
7799 @kindex epoch
7800 @kindex inspect
7801
7802 Version 18 of Emacs has a built-in window system called the @code{epoch}
7803 environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
7804 @code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
7805 each value is printed in its own window.
7806 @end ignore
7807 @end ifclear
7808
7809 @ifset LUCID
7810 @node Energize
7811 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Energize
7812
7813 @cindex Energize
7814 The Energize Programming System is an integrated development environment
7815 that includes a point-and-click interface to many programming tools.
7816 When you use @value{GDBN} in this environment, you can use the standard
7817 Energize graphical interface to drive @value{GDBN}; you can also, if you
7818 choose, type @value{GDBN} commands as usual in a debugging window. Even if
7819 you use the graphical interface, the debugging window (which uses Emacs,
7820 and resembles the standard Emacs interface to @value{GDBN}) displays the
7821 equivalent commands, so that the history of your debugging session is
7822 properly reflected.
7823
7824 When Energize starts up a @value{GDBN} session, it uses one of the
7825 command-line options @samp{-energize} or @samp{-cadillac} (``cadillac''
7826 is the name of the communications protocol used by the Energize system).
7827 This option makes @value{GDBN} run as one of the tools in the Energize Tool
7828 Set: it sends all output to the Energize kernel, and accept input from
7829 it as well.
7830
7831 See the user manual for the Energize Programming System for
7832 information on how to use the Energize graphical interface and the other
7833 development tools that Energize integrates with @value{GDBN}.
7834
7835 @end ifset
7836
7837 @node GDB Bugs
7838 @chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
7839 @cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
7840 @cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
7841
7842 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
7843
7844 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
7845 may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
7846 the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better. Bug
7847 reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
7848
7849 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7850 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7851
7852 @menu
7853 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7854 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7855 @end menu
7856
7857 @node Bug Criteria
7858 @section Have you found a bug?
7859 @cindex bug criteria
7860
7861 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7862
7863 @itemize @bullet
7864 @item
7865 @cindex fatal signal
7866 @cindex debugger crash
7867 @cindex crash of debugger
7868 If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7869 @value{GDBN} bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
7870
7871 @item
7872 @cindex error on valid input
7873 If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7874
7875 @item
7876 @cindex invalid input
7877 If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
7878 that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
7879 ``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
7880 for traditional practice''.
7881
7882 @item
7883 If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
7884 for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
7885 @end itemize
7886
7887 @node Bug Reporting
7888 @section How to report bugs
7889 @cindex bug reports
7890 @cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
7891
7892 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
7893 If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
7894 contact that organization first.
7895
7896 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7897 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the GNU Emacs
7898 distribution.
7899
7900 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @value{GDBN} to one
7901 of these addresses:
7902
7903 @example
7904 bug-gdb@@prep.ai.mit.edu
7905 @{ucbvax|mit-eddie|uunet@}!prep.ai.mit.edu!bug-gdb
7906 @end example
7907
7908 @strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
7909 @samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of @value{GDBN} do not want to
7910 receive bug reports. Those that do, have arranged to receive @samp{bug-gdb}.
7911
7912 The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
7913 serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
7914 the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
7915 newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
7916 problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
7917 path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
7918 we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
7919 bug reports to the mailing list.
7920
7921 As a last resort, send bug reports on paper to:
7922
7923 @example
7924 GNU Debugger Bugs
7925 Free Software Foundation
7926 545 Tech Square
7927 Cambridge, MA 02139
7928 @end example
7929
7930 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7931 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7932 fact or leave it out, state it!
7933
7934 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7935 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7936 assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
7937 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
7938 stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
7939 name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
7940 of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
7941 the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
7942 easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
7943
7944 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7945 the bug if it is new to us. It is not as important as what happens if
7946 the bug is already known. Therefore, always write your bug reports on
7947 the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7948
7949 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7950 bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
7951 @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
7952 bugs properly.
7953
7954 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7955
7956 @itemize @bullet
7957 @item
7958 The version of @value{GDBN}. @value{GDBN} announces it if you start with no
7959 arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show version}.
7960
7961 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7962 the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
7963
7964 @item
7965 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7966 version number.
7967
7968 @item
7969 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.
7970 ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
7971
7972 @item
7973 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you
7974 are debugging---e.g. ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
7975
7976 @item
7977 The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
7978 observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
7979 you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
7980 Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7981
7982 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7983 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7984
7985 @item
7986 A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
7987 reproduce the bug.
7988
7989 @item
7990 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7991 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7992
7993 Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we will
7994 certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7995 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. We are human, after all. You
7996 might as well not give us a chance to make a mistake.
7997
7998 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7999 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as,
8000 your copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a
8001 bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy
8002 might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash,
8003 then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not
8004 happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we
8005 would not be able to draw any conclusion from our observations.
8006
8007 @item
8008 If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
8009 diffs. If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
8010 it by context, not by line number.
8011
8012 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8013 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8014 @end itemize
8015
8016 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8017
8018 @itemize @bullet
8019 @item
8020 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8021
8022 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8023 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8024 changes will not affect it.
8025
8026 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8027 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8028 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8029 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8030
8031 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8032 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8033 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8034 less time, etc.
8035
8036 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8037 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8038
8039 @item
8040 A patch for the bug.
8041
8042 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8043 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8044 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8045 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8046
8047 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
8048 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8049 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
8050 to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8051
8052 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8053 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8054 help us to understand.
8055
8056 @item
8057 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8058
8059 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8060 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8061 @end itemize
8062
8063 @c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
8064 @c and consists of the two following files:
8065 @c rluser.texinfo
8066 @c inc-hist.texi
8067 @c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
8068 @c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
8069 @include rluser.texinfo
8070 @include inc-hist.texi
8071
8072 @ifset NOVEL
8073 @node Renamed Commands
8074 @appendix Renamed Commands
8075
8076 The following commands were renamed in GDB 4, in order to make the
8077 command set as a whole more consistent and easier to use and remember:
8078
8079 @kindex add-syms
8080 @kindex delete environment
8081 @kindex info copying
8082 @kindex info convenience
8083 @kindex info directories
8084 @kindex info editing
8085 @kindex info history
8086 @kindex info targets
8087 @kindex info values
8088 @kindex info version
8089 @kindex info warranty
8090 @kindex set addressprint
8091 @kindex set arrayprint
8092 @kindex set prettyprint
8093 @kindex set screen-height
8094 @kindex set screen-width
8095 @kindex set unionprint
8096 @kindex set vtblprint
8097 @kindex set demangle
8098 @kindex set asm-demangle
8099 @kindex set sevenbit-strings
8100 @kindex set array-max
8101 @kindex set caution
8102 @kindex set history write
8103 @kindex show addressprint
8104 @kindex show arrayprint
8105 @kindex show prettyprint
8106 @kindex show screen-height
8107 @kindex show screen-width
8108 @kindex show unionprint
8109 @kindex show vtblprint
8110 @kindex show demangle
8111 @kindex show asm-demangle
8112 @kindex show sevenbit-strings
8113 @kindex show array-max
8114 @kindex show caution
8115 @kindex show history write
8116 @kindex unset
8117
8118 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8119 @ifinfo
8120 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8121 @example
8122 OLD COMMAND NEW COMMAND
8123 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8124 --------------- -------------------------------
8125 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8126 add-syms add-symbol-file
8127 delete environment unset environment
8128 info convenience show convenience
8129 info copying show copying
8130 info directories show directories
8131 info editing show commands
8132 info history show values
8133 info targets help target
8134 info values show values
8135 info version show version
8136 info warranty show warranty
8137 set/show addressprint set/show print address
8138 set/show array-max set/show print elements
8139 set/show arrayprint set/show print array
8140 set/show asm-demangle set/show print asm-demangle
8141 set/show caution set/show confirm
8142 set/show demangle set/show print demangle
8143 set/show history write set/show history save
8144 set/show prettyprint set/show print pretty
8145 set/show screen-height set/show height
8146 set/show screen-width set/show width
8147 set/show sevenbit-strings set/show print sevenbit-strings
8148 set/show unionprint set/show print union
8149 set/show vtblprint set/show print vtbl
8150
8151 unset [No longer an alias for delete]
8152 @end example
8153 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8154 @end ifinfo
8155
8156 @tex
8157 \vskip \parskip\vskip \baselineskip
8158 \halign{\tt #\hfil &\qquad#&\tt #\hfil\cr
8159 {\bf Old Command} &&{\bf New Command}\cr
8160 add-syms &&add-symbol-file\cr
8161 delete environment &&unset environment\cr
8162 info convenience &&show convenience\cr
8163 info copying &&show copying\cr
8164 info directories &&show directories \cr
8165 info editing &&show commands\cr
8166 info history &&show values\cr
8167 info targets &&help target\cr
8168 info values &&show values\cr
8169 info version &&show version\cr
8170 info warranty &&show warranty\cr
8171 set{\rm / }show addressprint &&set{\rm / }show print address\cr
8172 set{\rm / }show array-max &&set{\rm / }show print elements\cr
8173 set{\rm / }show arrayprint &&set{\rm / }show print array\cr
8174 set{\rm / }show asm-demangle &&set{\rm / }show print asm-demangle\cr
8175 set{\rm / }show caution &&set{\rm / }show confirm\cr
8176 set{\rm / }show demangle &&set{\rm / }show print demangle\cr
8177 set{\rm / }show history write &&set{\rm / }show history save\cr
8178 set{\rm / }show prettyprint &&set{\rm / }show print pretty\cr
8179 set{\rm / }show screen-height &&set{\rm / }show height\cr
8180 set{\rm / }show screen-width &&set{\rm / }show width\cr
8181 set{\rm / }show sevenbit-strings &&set{\rm / }show print sevenbit-strings\cr
8182 set{\rm / }show unionprint &&set{\rm / }show print union\cr
8183 set{\rm / }show vtblprint &&set{\rm / }show print vtbl\cr
8184 \cr
8185 unset &&\rm(No longer an alias for delete)\cr
8186 }
8187 @end tex
8188 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8189 @end ifset
8190
8191 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
8192 @node Formatting Documentation
8193 @appendix Formatting Documentation
8194
8195 @cindex GDB reference card
8196 @cindex reference card
8197 The GDB 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
8198 for printing with PostScript or GhostScript, in the @file{gdb}
8199 subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
8200 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
8201 release.}. If you can use PostScript or GhostScript with your printer,
8202 you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
8203
8204 The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
8205 can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
8206
8207 @example
8208 make refcard.dvi
8209 @end example
8210
8211 The GDB reference card is designed to print in landscape mode on US
8212 ``letter'' size paper; that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
8213 high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
8214 your @sc{dvi} output program.
8215
8216 @cindex documentation
8217
8218 All the documentation for GDB comes as part of the machine-readable
8219 distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
8220 a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
8221 on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
8222 formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
8223 and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
8224
8225 GDB includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info version of
8226 this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info file is
8227 @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
8228 subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
8229 necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
8230 but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in GNU Emacs
8231 or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the GNU
8232 Texinfo distribution.
8233
8234 If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
8235 Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
8236 @code{makeinfo}.
8237
8238 If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level GDB
8239 source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of version @value{GDBVN}), you can
8240 make the Info file by typing:
8241
8242 @example
8243 cd gdb
8244 make gdb.info
8245 @end example
8246
8247 If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
8248 a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
8249 Texinfo definitions file.
8250
8251 @TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
8252 produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
8253 document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
8254 has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
8255 command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
8256 (for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may
8257 require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
8258
8259 @TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
8260 @file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
8261 written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot read, much less
8262 typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
8263 and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
8264 directory.
8265
8266 If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
8267 typeset and print this manual. First switch to the the @file{gdb}
8268 subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
8269 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and then type:
8270
8271 @example
8272 make gdb.dvi
8273 @end example
8274
8275 @node Installing GDB
8276 @appendix Installing GDB
8277 @cindex configuring GDB
8278 @cindex installation
8279
8280 GDB comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
8281 of preparing GDB for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
8282 build the @code{gdb} program.
8283 @iftex
8284 @c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
8285 @footnote{If you have a more recent version of GDB than @value{GDBVN},
8286 look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
8287 installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
8288 @end iftex
8289
8290 The GDB distribution includes all the source code you need for GDB in
8291 a single directory, whose name is usually composed by appending the
8292 version number to @samp{gdb}.
8293
8294 For example, the GDB version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
8295 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory. That directory contains:
8296
8297 @table @code
8298 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
8299 script for configuring GDB and all its supporting libraries.
8300
8301 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
8302 the source specific to GDB itself
8303
8304 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8305 source for the Binary File Descriptor library
8306
8307 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
8308 GNU include files
8309
8310 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
8311 source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
8312
8313 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
8314 source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
8315
8316 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
8317 source for the GNU command-line interface
8318
8319 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
8320 source for the GNU filename pattern-matching subroutine
8321
8322 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
8323 source for the GNU memory-mapped malloc package
8324 @end table
8325
8326 The simplest way to configure and build GDB is to run @code{configure}
8327 from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
8328 this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
8329
8330 First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
8331 if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}. Pass the
8332 identifier for the platform on which GDB will run as an
8333 argument.
8334
8335 For example:
8336
8337 @example
8338 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8339 ./configure @var{host}
8340 make
8341 @end example
8342
8343 @noindent
8344 where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
8345 @samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where GDB will run.
8346 (You can often leave off @var{host}; @code{configure} tries to guess the
8347 correct value by examining your system.)
8348
8349 Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
8350 @file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
8351 libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
8352 binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
8353
8354 @code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
8355 system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
8356 shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
8357
8358 @example
8359 sh configure @var{host}
8360 @end example
8361
8362 If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
8363 directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
8364 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN}, @code{configure}
8365 creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
8366 you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
8367
8368 You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
8369 subordinate directories in the GDB distribution if you only want to
8370 configure that subdirectory, but be sure to specify a path to it.
8371
8372 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, type the following to configure only
8373 the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
8374
8375 @example
8376 @group
8377 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8378 ../configure @var{host}
8379 @end group
8380 @end example
8381
8382 You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
8383 However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
8384 the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
8385 that GDB uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
8386 let GDB debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
8387
8388 @menu
8389 * Separate Objdir:: Compiling GDB in another directory
8390 * Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
8391 * configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
8392 @end menu
8393
8394 @node Separate Objdir
8395 @section Compiling GDB in another directory
8396
8397 If you want to run GDB versions for several host or target machines,
8398 you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
8399 host and target. @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
8400 allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
8401 rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
8402 handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (GNU @code{make} does), running
8403 @code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
8404 program specified there.
8405
8406 To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
8407 with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
8408 (You also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
8409 itself from your working directory. If the path to @code{configure}
8410 would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
8411 the @samp{--srcdir} option; it will be assumed.)
8412
8413 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build GDB in a separate
8414 directory for a Sun 4 like this:
8415
8416 @example
8417 @group
8418 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8419 mkdir ../gdb-sun4
8420 cd ../gdb-sun4
8421 ../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
8422 make
8423 @end group
8424 @end example
8425
8426 When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
8427 directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
8428 (and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
8429 the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
8430 directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and GDB itself in
8431 @file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
8432
8433 One popular reason to build several GDB configurations in separate
8434 directories is to configure GDB for cross-compiling (where GDB
8435 runs on one machine---the host---while debugging programs that run on
8436 another machine---the target). You specify a cross-debugging target by
8437 giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
8438
8439 When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
8440 it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
8441 called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
8442
8443 The @code{Makefile} that @code{configure} generates in each source
8444 directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
8445 directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
8446 directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{path}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
8447 will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
8448
8449 When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
8450 directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
8451 if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
8452 with each other.
8453
8454 @node Config Names
8455 @section Specifying names for hosts and targets
8456
8457 The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
8458 script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
8459 aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
8460 of information in the following pattern:
8461
8462 @example
8463 @var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
8464 @end example
8465
8466 For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
8467 or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
8468 option. The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
8469
8470 The @code{configure} script accompanying GDB does not provide
8471 any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
8472 aliases. @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
8473 @code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
8474 script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
8475 abbreviations---for example:
8476
8477 @smallexample
8478 % sh config.sub sun4
8479 sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
8480 % sh config.sub sun3
8481 m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
8482 % sh config.sub decstation
8483 mips-dec-ultrix4.2
8484 % sh config.sub hp300bsd
8485 m68k-hp-bsd
8486 % sh config.sub i386v
8487 i386-unknown-sysv
8488 % sh config.sub i786v
8489 Invalid configuration `i786v': machine `i786v' not recognized
8490 @end smallexample
8491
8492 @noindent
8493 @code{config.sub} is also distributed in the GDB source
8494 directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
8495
8496 @node configure Options
8497 @section @code{configure} options
8498
8499 Here is a summary of the @code{configure} options and arguments that
8500 are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}. @code{configure} also has
8501 several other options not listed here. @inforef{What Configure
8502 Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @code{configure}.
8503 @c FIXME: Would this be more, or less, useful as an xref (ref to printed
8504 @c manual in the printed manual, ref to info file only from the info file)?
8505
8506 @example
8507 configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
8508 @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
8509 @r{[}--srcdir=@var{path}@r{]}
8510 @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
8511 @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]} @var{host}
8512 @end example
8513
8514 @noindent
8515 You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
8516 @samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
8517 @samp{--}.
8518
8519 @table @code
8520 @item --help
8521 Display a quick summary of how to invoke @code{configure}.
8522
8523 @item -prefix=@var{dir}
8524 Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
8525 @file{@var{dir}}.
8526
8527 @item --srcdir=@var{path}
8528 @strong{Warning: using this option requires GNU @code{make}, or another
8529 @code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
8530 Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
8531 GDB source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
8532 build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
8533 directories. @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
8534 the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
8535 directory @var{path}. @code{configure} will create directories under
8536 the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
8537 @var{path}.
8538
8539 @item --norecursion
8540 Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
8541 propagate configuration to subdirectories.
8542
8543 @item --rm
8544 @emph{Remove} files otherwise built during configuration.
8545
8546 @c This does not work (yet if ever). FIXME.
8547 @c @item --parse=@var{lang} @dots{}
8548 @c Configure the GDB expression parser to parse the listed languages.
8549 @c @samp{all} configures GDB for all supported languages. To get a
8550 @c list of all supported languages, omit the argument. Without this
8551 @c option, GDB is configured to parse all supported languages.
8552
8553 @item --target=@var{target}
8554 Configure GDB for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
8555 @var{target}. Without this option, GDB is configured to debug
8556 programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as GDB itself.
8557
8558 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
8559
8560 @item @var{host} @dots{}
8561 Configure GDB to run on the specified @var{host}.
8562
8563 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
8564 @end table
8565
8566 @noindent
8567 @code{configure} accepts other options, for compatibility with
8568 configuring other GNU tools recursively; but these are the only
8569 options that affect GDB or its supporting libraries.
8570 @end ifclear
8571
8572 @node Index
8573 @unnumbered Index
8574
8575 @printindex cp
8576
8577 @tex
8578 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8579 % meantime:
8580 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8581 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8582 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8583 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8584 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8585 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/},}
8586 \centerline{{\bf\fontname\tenbf}, and}
8587 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8588 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8589 \page\colophon
8590 % Blame: pesch@cygnus.com, 1991.
8591 @end tex
8592
8593 @contents
8594 @bye
This page took 0.307017 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.